Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Specialty Retail / Halfords Group / FY2015 Annual Report

Halfords Group
Annual Report 2015

HFD · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker HFD
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Specialty Retail
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2015 Annual Report · Halfords Group
Loading PDF…
Halfords Group plc
Annual Report and Accounts 
for the period ended 3 April 2015

www.halfordscompany.com 
Stock Code: HFD

GETTING INTO 
GEAR 2015

H

a

l

f

o

r

d

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

p

e

r

i

o

d

e

n

d

e

d

3

A

p

r

i

l

2

0

1

5

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Introduction to

HALFORDS

For more than 110 years Halfords has been synonymous with 
travel. We are the UK’s leading retailer of automotive and 
cycling products, and the leading independent operator in auto 
repair. Many of our brands hold number one sales positions, 
and we see clear opportunities to grow market share in the 
short and long-term future. 

Our vision is clear: we help and inspire our customers with 
their life on the move. 

GROUP AT A
GLANCE

HELPING AND 
INSPIRING 
CUSTOMERS  
WITH THEIR LIFE 
ON THE MOVE

POINT RETAIL 
STRATEGY

RETAIL

To deliver growth in retail across our three 
strategic pillars, we are pursuing a five-point 
programme called Getting Into Gear, which 
is designed to deliver a significantly improved 
customer experience. 

Read more on Retail Strategy 
on pages 14 and 15

GROUP
STRATEGY

POINT AUTOCENTRES 
STRATEGY

4

AUTOCENTRES

Read the Operational Review on 
page 12

Our footprint of over 300 Autocentres puts us 
within convenient reach of the majority of the UK 
population, meaning we are uniquely placed to 
fulfil our first strategic pillar, Supporting Drivers of 
Every Car. 

Read more on Autocentres Strategy 
on pages 16 and 17

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015FACTS AND FIGURES

305

AUTOCENTRES  
ACROSS THE UK1

2,000

AUTOCENTRE  
COLLEAGUES2

160k

PRODUCTS 
ONLINE

1 As at 3 April 2015
2  In addition there are circa 1,000 colleagues in our support 

centre, supply chain and warehouse and distribution 
operations

467

RETAIL STORES IN  
THE UK AND ROI1

8,000

RETAIL  
COLLEAGUES2

£1bn

GROUP 
REVENUE 

ONLINE REPORT
halfords.annualreport2015.com 
Read our Annual Report online, including the full 
Remuneration Policy.

CORPORATE WEBSITE
www.halfordscompany.com
Catch up with our latest news and learn more 
about Halfords on our corporate website.

STRATEGIC REPORT

OVERVIEW

Group Highlights

Chairman’s Statement

Marketplace

Business Model

Material Issues

STRATEGY

Operational Review

Retail Strategy

Autocentres Strategy

Milestones

Sustainability

PERFORMANCE

Key Performance Indicators

Chief Financial Officer’s Review

RISK

Risks and Uncertainties

GOVERNANCE

Board of Directors

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

Nomination Committee Report

Audit Committee Report

Remuneration Committee Report
— Remuneration Policy Sumnmary
— Annual Remuneration Report

Directors’ Responsibilities

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Auditor’s Report

Index to Financials

Consolidated Income Statement
Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position
Consolidated Statement of Changes in 
Shareholders’ Equity
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

Accounting Policies

Notes to the Financial Statements

Company Balance Sheet
Reconciliation of Movements in 
Total Shareholders’ Funds
Accounting Policies

Notes to the Financial Statements

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

Five Year Record

Key Performance Indicators

Company Information

Integrated Reporting

2

3

4

6

8

12

14

16

18

19

22

25

32

38

39

42

50

52

56
58
62
71

74

76

77

78

79

80
81

83

89

106

107
108

109

112

112

113

IBC

01

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOVERVIEWSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > OVERVIEW

GROUP
HIGHLIGHTS

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

Revenue
£m

+6.9%

m
9
.
4
0
0
,
1
£

m
7
.
9
3
9
£

m
7
.
9
6
8
£

m
1
.
3
6
8
£

m
3
.
1
7
8
£

Underlying profit before tax
£m

Underlying basic earnings 
per share pence

+11.4%

+13.8%

m
6
.
5
2
1
£

m
2
.
2
9
£

m
0
.
2
7
£

m
8
.
2
7
£

m
1
.
1
8
£

p
2
.
3
4

p
7
.
3
3

p
7
.
2
3

p
7
.
7
2

p
8
.
8
2

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

Underlying EBITDA
£m

EBITDA margin
%

Dividend per ordinary share
pence

+8.7%

+18bps

+15.4%

m
2
.
3
5
1
£

m
6
.
3
2
1
£

m
9
.
9
0
1
£

m
4
.
3
0
1
£

m
1
.
1
0
1
£

%
6
.
7
1

%
3
.
4
1

%
9
.
1
1

%
8
.
0
1

%
9
.
0
1

p
0
.
2
2

p
0
.
2
2

p
1
.
7
1

p
5
.
6
1

p
3
.
4
1

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

OPERATIONAL HIGHLIGHTS

72

STORES TRADING 
UNDER REFRESHED 
FORMAT

46%

RETAIL COLLEAGUES 
THROUGH GEAR 2

77%

RETAIL NET 
PROMOTER SCORE

+11.4%

GROWTH IN 
CYCLING SALES

+14.3%

GROWTH IN ONLINE 
RETAIL SALES

4

CYCLE REPUBLIC SHOPS 
OPENED IN THE YEAR

All FY15 numbers presented on this page represent the 52 week proforma results for the period ended 27 March 2015.

02

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015CHAIRMAN’S
STATEMENT

“ This was another year of 
strong revenue growth, 
this time against tough 
comparatives. We are 
delighted to have exceeded 
£1bn Group Revenue. 
Our strategy is also 
progressing well as we build 
a sustainable platform for 
future growth.”

£1bn

GROUP REVENUE

+7.0%

RETAIL LIKE-FOR-LIKE 
SALES

I am pleased to report strong 
financial results for Halfords and 
further progress on our strategic 
priorities. 

At the core of our strategy is customer service 
and investment in our colleagues, proposition and 
infrastructure. In Retail, colleagues progressed 
well through their Gear 2 training and we have 
more refreshed stores, launched Cycle Republic 
and significantly strengthened authority in our key 
categories. Autocentres has a clear strategy under 
new leadership and has delivered an improved 
sales performance whilst continuing to invest.

There is still more to do in both Retail and 
Autocentres; FY16 will be a busy year of activity, 
with the business supported by a tailwind of 
momentum and a strong, engaged team of 
management and colleagues.

The financial results for the year and confidence 
in the future prospects have enabled the Board to 
recommend a full year dividend of 16.5 pence, an 
increase of 15.4%.

On behalf of the Board I would like to thank all 
11,000 of our colleagues for their enthusiasm and 
commitment to the journey this business is on. I 
would also like to thank both Matt Davies, who 
left at the end of April, and Andrew Findlay, who 
leaves later this year. It has been a real pleasure 
working with both of them – their contribution to 
Halfords has been outstanding. 

In May 2015 the Board appointed Jill McDonald 
as Chief Executive Officer and we are looking 
forward to the significant contribution she will 
make. She joins a business that I believe is in 
great shape, with significant opportunities ahead.

The new financial year has started positively, with 
continued progress in delivering our strategic 
priorities.

Dennis Millard 
Chairman 
4 June 2015

OUR NEW CHIEF EXECUTIVE 

Halfords is a business and a brand that resonates with me and so I was delighted when offered the 
opportunity to become Chief Executive. In my first few weeks here I have been really impressed 
with the commitment and enthusiasm of our colleagues, and it is very apparent that the focus on 
delivering customer service excellence is becoming embedded in the DNA of the business. 

Halfords has clearly made great progress on its strategic plans in the last year, and we will continue to 
deliver the priorities for FY16, as well as looking and planning further ahead.  

I look forward to working with the entire team of management and colleagues to continue the positive 
journey that this company is on and to build upon it even further.

Jill McDonald
Chief Executive Officer
4 June 2015

03

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOVERVIEWSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > OVERVIEW

MARKETPLACE

“ Our presence in the auto, 
cycling and leisure markets 
is unique in the UK. 
Backed by a heritage and 
brand trusted by millions, 
our position is strong, 
and we’re well-placed to 
thrive in changing market 
conditions.”

04

WE CONTINUE TO GROW 
MARKET SHARE IN OUR 
CORE SECTORS, BUILDING 
AND MAINTAINING LEADING 
POSITIONS.

Our product ranges continue to evolve in line with 
market requirements and advances in automotive 
technology. For example, stop-start batteries are 
becoming increasingly prevalent and we have the 
right equipment and fully-trained colleagues to be 
able to cater to this demand, both in our Retail 
stores and our Autocentres.

We have seen good growth in some subsections 
of our in-car technology offering. In-car cameras 
(‘dash cams’) have proved very popular, with 
a full fitting service just landed. In multimedia, 
connectivity and streaming technology, this year 
saw us launch an Apple-certified system and an  
Android one is coming soon.

The sat nav market continues to decline, but 
this is becoming an increasingly smaller and less 
important part of our business. Key products such 
as child car seats continue to be important for 
customers and are providing growth.

Likewise, the services we offer alongside our 
products continue to evolve, as evidenced by  
the continued success of our “3Bs” (bulbs, 
blades, batteries) fitting service. In FY15 in the 
Retail stores we sold 5.3 million car bulbs and 
fitted 41% of these on demand.

The growth in new drivers, cars, miles driven 
and car complexity is also an opportunity for our 
Autocentres business to attract and retain new 
customers. Trust, value, convenience and the 
attitude of our colleagues are also key to doing 
this as well as retaining our long-standing Halfords 
customers. There are few businesses that can 
match us in what we offer.

MARKETPLACE
Halfords operates in a number 
of  retail and service markets 
across our 467 stores1 and 305 
autocentres1 throughout the UK.

Our products and services can be grouped into 
auto, cycling and leisure, and our presence in 
these markets is unique. With 90% of the UK 
population living within a 20 minute drive of one of 
our locations, we are within convenient access for 
a large customer base.

Backed by a heritage and brand trusted by 
millions, our position is strong, and we’re well-
placed to thrive in changing market conditions.

SUPPORTING DRIVERS OF EVERY CAR
The number of drivers in the UK (the “car parc”) is 
increasing. It is estimated that there are currently 
approximately 700,000 new drivers each year and 
the number of car registrations is growing faster 
than the number of cars being written off. The 
number of miles driven in the UK increased again 
in 2014, having declined during the recession. 
Petrol prices dropping to a four-year low recently 
will help this trend to continue.

In this expanding market, Halfords supports 
drivers of all ages. Our expertise and service is 
important to both new and experienced drivers 
alike. Winning the hearts and minds of new 
drivers through our expertise and value as they 
gain experience is key to building a long-term 
customer base.

The average car in the UK is currently estimated 
to be 7.4 years old. More new cars on the road 
is conducive to increased fitting and servicing 
requirements, as newer cars are becoming more 
technically advanced and have more specific 
requirements for maintenance. The shift from ‘DIY’ 
to ‘Do-It-For-Me’ (DIFM) is clear.

1 As at 3 April 2015

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015INSPIRING CYCLISTS OF EVERY AGE
The cycling market in the UK is changing.  
Whilst the total volume of bikes sold has remained 
level over the past few years, according to Mintel, 
the popularity of cycling has led to customers 
willing to pay more for better products and more 
on accessories, meaning the market is growing in 
value terms. Mintel estimate the market will grow 
by c.33% in the next five years.

Halfords have reacted to and encouraged this 
trend by focusing on premium ranges, making 
available a wide range of parts and accessories, 
and leveraging the knowledge of the colleagues 
to enhance recommendations and upselling. We 
also remain very focused on our children’s bikes 
offer and there has also been significant effort to 
improve our offering on entry-level bikes.

Our bike sales are split by type, with mountain 
and hybrid making up the bulk of adult bike sales. 
Road bikes represent a smaller proportion of 
volume, but with higher average selling prices. 
There has been considerable growth in sales of 
foldable commuter bikes.

The trend for road bikes is supported by 
Government regulation, with new laws that road 
infrastructure in new builds must take cycling 
into consideration. In recent months the Cycle 
Superhighways in London received the green 
light and work has already started to create them. 

Halfords is one of many organisations lobbying 
the Government to invest £10 in cycling for every 
person in the UK.

Finally, as we see an increased demand for higher-
value bikes, demand for cycle repair has also 
increased - another area of focus for the business.

EQUIPPING FAMILIES  
FOR THEIR LEISURE TIME
This third category pillar occupies the smallest 
element of Halfords Retail sales. It is spread 
across several fragmented markets, principally 
encompassing camping and outdoor leisure.  
The range includes a variety of strategically 
chosen impulse products, which change 
throughout the year.

This investment could further boost the valuable 
road bike market, which is mainly represented in 
city centre cycling. This has driven our introduction 
of a new cycling only store format, Cycle Republic, 
to be opened in London and other key city cycling 
locations, where Halfords’ penetration has been 
low.

These new Cycle Republic stores are giving us 
access to a new customer base, with a different 
appetite; a much higher proportion of sales 
being accounted for by accessories than in other 
locations.

Female cyclists are another area of focus for 
us, as they’re currently not being catered for 
enough in the premium market. While a significant 
amount of SKUs under £500 are accounted for by 
women’s bikes, the reverse is true for bikes above 
that price. In response, we are launching five 
premium women’s bikes in FY16, three from  
the 13 range, and two in the VooDoo range.

We are experimenting with electric and power-
assisted bikes in our Carrera range, in response to 
an emerging trend in Europe. We anticipate these 
products being particularly popular within our 
London market, and for older cyclists.

SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS

FREE BIKE WORKSHOPS

In FY15 over 20,000 children and parents attended free Kids’ Bike 
Workshops in store to learn the basics of how to look after their bike, 
with 96% of parents likely to recommend the summer workshop to 
others. In FY16, together with the Easter holiday, stores will run the 
workshop in the summer and during the October half-term week. 

Building on the success of these workshops, Halfords now also 
partners with the Scouts Association, with over 9,000 children being 
taught bike maintenance as part of the Cub Cyclist Activity badge. In 
addition, Halfords now runs tailored workshops in schools, focused 
on year-six pupils as they progress through Bikeability (formerly called 
cycling proficiency) with over 12,000 attending during the year.

In February 2015, Halfords launched a partnership with Breeze, British 
Cycling’s women’s network. The partnership will involve promotion of 
the network and its benefits, bike mechanic support at key Breeze 
events and workshops teaching women some elements of bike 
maintenance.

See more at  
www.halfords.com/bikeclub and  
www.scouts.org.uk/halfords

05

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOVERVIEWSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > OVERVIEW

BUSINESS
MODEL

KEY PARTNERS

•	 PRODUCT DESIGNERS

•	 ACCREDITATION BODIES

•	 PARTS FACTORS

•	 PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS

•	 BRAND OWNERS

•	

IT & NETWORK PROVIDERS

•	 REGULATORS 

& GOVERNMENT

KEY RESOURCES

•	 BRANDS

•	 467 STORES1

•	 c.11,000 COLLEAGUES

•	 CASH GENERATION

•	 305 AUTOCENTRES1

•	 COMPETITIVE FUNDING

•	 CATEGORY EXPERTISE

•	 HALFORDS ASIA SOURCING

•	 CENTRALISED DISTRIBUTION 

•	 OWN BRANDS

CENTRES

KEY ACTIVITIES

•	 MARKETING

•	 BUYING

•	 RETAILING AND 
MERCHANDISING

•	 TRAINING & DEVELOPMENT

•	

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

•	 DISTRIBUTION

•	 ONLINE FULFILMENT

•	 BUILD, FIT, REPAIR AND 
GARAGE SERVICES

VALUE PROPOSITION

PRICES YOU CAN TRUST

QUALITY YOU CAN TRUST

RANGE YOU CAN RELY ON

SERVICE THAT WOWS

A UNIQUE PRODUCT AND SERVICE OFFER FOR MOTORISTS, CYCLISTS AND FAMILIES  
WHICH PROVIDES AN UNMATCHED COMBINATION OF SERVICE, CONVENIENCE AND RANGE. 

HELPING AND INSPIRING OUR CUSTOMERS WITH THEIR LIFE ON THE MOVE. 

CHANNELS

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS

•	 TV, RADIO, EMAIL AND HIGH STREET ADVERTISING

•	 “WE DO MORE FOR YOU”

•	 STORE COLLECTION OR HOME DELIVERY

•	 LOW COST FITTING, BUILDING AND REPAIR SERVICE

•	 TABLET AND MOBILE OPTIMISED WEBSITE

•	 KNOWLEDGEABLE, HELPFUL COLLEAGUES

•	 REFINING A CONSISTENT AND INTEGRATED ONLINE  

•	 CONVENIENT LOCATIONS FOR 90% OF POPULATION

AND IN-STORE EXPERIENCE

OUR PILLARS

1 As at 3 April 2015

06

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015KEY PARTNERS

KEY RESOURCES

KEY ACTIVITIES

Our strategic relationships drive our ability to deliver 
value. More broadly we source our products from 
suppliers around the world who manufacture 
products to our designs and rigid specifications. 
Our various brands, including 13, Apollo, Carrera 
and Boardman, are designed in-house and 
manufactured in factories in the Far East. Our Hong 
Kong office manages the production lead times and 
arranges shipments to the UK.

In both our Retail and Autocentres businesses we 
have a close relationship with parts factors, giving 
us on-demand access to thousands of car parts 
without having to hold them in stock.

IT systems are crucial to how we operate, both 
in-store and in the Support Centre. During the year 
we completed the upgrade of our core operating 
platform (SAP) and are ready to start programmes to 
save time in-store.

See the material issues identified by engaging with 
our key partners on page 8

VALUE PROPOSITION

Our leading Auto and Cycling brands are sold across 
our 467 nationwide stores. Our 305 autocentres 
offer a full service, maintenance and repair service 
across all car marques. Within these establishments, 
our c.11,000 colleagues are face-to-face with our 
customers on a daily basis, allowing us to deliver the 
customer service we aspire to.

See what we are doing to support our colleagues in 
delivering this service on pages 9,10 and 17

We are a cash generative business and have 
generated £66.4m of free cash flow in the year. 
We are well supported by our banking syndicate, 
having amended the debt facility during the year and 
extended to November 2019.

Chief Financial Officer’s Review on page 25

We translate our category expertise to offer 
an unmatched range of products, all of which 
contribute to the Halfords brand.

Our stores generate profit from the combination of 
low-cost sourcing and supply chain coupled with our 
excellent marketing skills and national store network. 
In Autocentres, our structure allows us to offer a 
lower price than most franchised garages and a 
more comprehensive service than many independent 
garages can match.

Training and accreditation, such as our 3-Gears 
training programme, ensures that consistent product 
knowledge and service reaches our customers 
across all our locations.

3-Gears on page 10

Our internal operations draw from the best industry 
practice. Our retail operation sales plan is based 
on close attention to market demands. We source 
direct from global suppliers who manufacture 
products to our designs and rigid specifications.  
Our distribution team use their specialist knowledge 
to group and ship products in line with the sales plan.

Halfords are the nation’s go-to retailer for cyclists and motorists. Our products and services are as relevant to our customers today as they were when we started out over 100 years ago. 
We are setting out to grow our business by attracting more customers, encouraging them to buy more products and services, and persuading them to visit our stores and autocentres 
more often. To do this we make four promises:

PRICE
It is important to our growth plans that 
we offer prices our customers trust. 
We want our customers to feel they 
are getting value for money. We offer 
a number of bundled prices which 
mean none of the typical hidden 
costs that customers can encounter 
when, for example, having to buy the 
product then buy the fitting. More are 
to come.

QUALITY
Product quality is another important 
aspect of value for money. We want 
customers to have confidence that 
their purchases will last. In listening 
to our customers’ feedback we have 
made changes to our products to 
help customers trust our quality.

RANGE
Our smart category management 
ensures that we remain a natural 
destination for our customers by 
offering a range of products that 
suits their varied needs. Our range 
encompasses car parts, in-car 
technology, child seats, cycling, 
roof boxes, and outdoor leisure 
and camping equipment, with a 
combination of own brand and third 
party brands to meet customers’ 
needs.

SERVICE
We have four objectives to 
continually improve the experience of 
our customers:

•	 To make Halfords a great place 

to work

•	 To provide stores that we are 

proud of

•	 To provide services that make 

us the best

•	 To delight every customer

CHANNELS

CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS

We want to create a compelling shopping experience that excites customers, 
improves their knowledge of our products and services, and engages them 
emotionally with our brand. Along with our retail stores and autocentres where we 
engage with customers face-to-face, we recognise it is crucial to build our digital 
channels so that we can fully engage with customers online. Our ambition is to create 
a service-led, fully integrated digital proposition which will maintain our ongoing 
relevance.

Our ability to offer a friendly and expertise-based service is fundamental to sustainable 
sales growth. We want customers to have a better experience at Halfords than they 
would at non-service based retailers. This will mean they are more likely to spend 
more with us and recommend us to their friends. Our Service Revolution will ensure 
customers are served by colleagues who are enthusiastic about their role at Halfords 
and the products and services we offer. With stores less than a 20 mile drive away 
for 90% of the UK’s population, we are well-placed to foster convenient and close 
customer relationships.

See how developing our customer relationships is a material issue on page 8

OUR PILLARS

SUPPORTING DRIVERS OF EVERY CAR
Through our core categories of Car Maintenance,  
Car Enhancement and Car Servicing, we provide services 
and expertise to take the hassle out of motoring.

INSPIRING CYCLISTS OF EVERY AGE
Thanks to our scale, positioning and the successful extension 
of our ranges into the premium segment of the cycling market, 
we are the biggest player in cycling retail.

EQUIPPING FAMILIES FOR THEIR LEISURE TIME
Our camping and outdoor leisure ranges make up the 
smallest element of our retail sales, spread across several 
fragmented markets.

07

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOVERVIEWSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comMATERIAL
ISSUES

Halfords’ vision is to help and inspire our customers with their life on the move by offering unique in-store services and a compelling product range with expert 
services. The table below identifies the key stakeholders we interact with to achieve this vision and outlines how and why we engage with them.

Why we engage
Customers

Material issues

What we are doing

Customers want value, personalisation, 
and trustworthy advice and service. We 
want to know how we are performing so 
we can deliver unparalleled products and 
services.

•	 Value for money
•	 Customer service
•	 Convenience
•	 Range

Colleagues

Our colleagues are fundamental to the 
achievement of our customer experience 
ambitions.

Suppliers

Our brand relies heavily on the high 
standards of our carefully selected 
suppliers in order for us to deliver market-
leading products and services.

Investors

•	 Career opportunities
•	 Pay and conditions
•	 Training and development
•	
•	 Colleague engagement

Innovation

•	 Quality management
•	 Cost efficiency
•	 Ethical Trading policy
•	 Speed to market
•	 Security of supply

•	 Service Revolution
•	 The ‘H’ Factor
•	 Stores Fit to Shop
•	 21st Century Infrastructure
•	 Click with the Digital Future

‘3-Gears’ training programme - see page 10

•	
•	 Listening: surveys and colleague groups
•	
•	 Recognition and reward

‘Accelerate’ management development courses

•	 Far East trading office developing mutually beneficial 

relationships

•	 Logistics efficiencies and environmental management
•	 Supplier conferences

As a publicly listed company we need to 
provide fair, balanced and understandable 
information to instil trust and confidence 
and allow informed investment decisions 
to be made.

•	 Future-orientated information
•	 Risk information
•	 Operating and financial performance
•	 Dividend
•	 Access to management

Integrated reporting page – explained IBC

•	
•	 Consistent KPIs provided through clear and regular updates - 

see pages 22 to 24

•	 Responding to investor queries and meeting requests
•	 Recognition in Social Responsibility investor indices e.g. 

FTSE4Good

Communities

We aim to contribute positively to the 
communities and environment in which we 
operate.

•	

Impact of Group activities on the 
wider community

•	 Re-Cycle partnership
•	 Onley Prison workshops giving training and employment 

•	 Developing future customers

opportunities for ex-offenders

Media

As a business-to-consumer company, 
we need strong omnichannel exposure 
to connect with customers and our wider 
stakeholder audience.

•	 Reliable range, product and pricing 

information

•	 Transparency of reliable and timely 

Group information

•	 Free kids’ holiday bike clubs - see page 5
•	 Cub Scouts Cyclist Activity badge workshops - see page 5
•	 Stores will donate payroll hours to engage with local charities

•	 Product videos and peer reviews
•	 TV and radio advertising campaigns
•	 Email and PR customer engagement
•	
•	 Monitoring and responding to comments and concerns on social 

Improving Twitter, Facebook and YouTube content

media channels

Government

Policies and regulatory changes may 
provide both opportunities and risk to 
our operations. Working closely with the 
Government ensures that our products 
and services evolve.

•	 Transport policies and schemes
•	 CO2 reduction strategies

•	 Cycle to work policy campaigning
•	 DAB Radio working groups 
•	 Driver training and vehicle safety enhancements
•	 Engaging with VOSA, DVLA, TSI, ASA and HSE

08

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORT > OVERVIEWGetting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS

RETAIL APPRENTICESHIP 
SCHEME

Halfords Autocentres has had an apprenticeship scheme for over 20 years and 
currently has more than 200 apprentices employed in the business. Building on 
that success, Halfords Retail successfully piloted an apprenticeship scheme during 
the year and in February formally launched a programme to place 500 apprentices 
in stores over the first 12 months. 

Halfords goes above and beyond the usual apprenticeship model by offering 
a pre-apprenticeship training scheme, which equips candidates with four 
qualifications for those completing the three weeks intensive training: Halfords’ 
Gear 1 level training, a Retail Level 1 certificate, an Employability & Personal 
Development Certificate, and Level 1 or 2 in Maths & English. The scheme 
is open to people who are not in education, employment or training and on 
completion of this training, candidates are interviewed and, if successful, offered 
apprenticeships.

See more information on Autocentres’ 
apprenticeship scheme on page 17

CASE STUDY

STRATEGIC DELIVERY

CYCLE REPAIR

During the final quarter of FY14 we trialled a new cycle repair operating 
model in just over 50 stores. This proved successful, with the growth in repair 
sales outstripping the rest of the stores and also a significant increase in the 
average repair transaction value, reflecting the more complex work being 
undertaken. By the end of FY15 the new model had been rolled out to 405 
stores; 339 receiving a full rollout and 66 receiving a smaller-scale option.

The stores with full rollout received a dedicated repair work station, complete 
with a parts washer and all of the necessary tools and equipment to do 
anything from a basic puncture to a complex service or repair job. In the 
majority of stores the work stations are in the back-of-shop space, improving 
efficiency and productivity by taking the work away from the shop floor. These 
stores also receive a dedicated Gear 3 level technician, each of whom have 
had intensive cycle repair training.

“ We see huge potential 
for the programme to 
get people back into 
work and a new wave 
of talent into retail”

“ We have now 
upgraded our cycle 
repair capability in 
over 400 stores” 

09

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOVERVIEWSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC DELIVERY

3-GEARS 
PROGRAMME

Two years ago we launched ‘3-Gears’, a qualification programme that trains 
and rewards colleagues for gaining expertise. The three Gears represent the 
different stages of qualification:

GEAR 1 – Gear 1 applies to all colleagues and is completed over their first 
three-month period with Halfords. We use structured e-learning modules 
that cover retail skills, product knowledge and customer service. The 
outcome is that all store colleagues will be qualified to serve customers.

GEAR 2 – Gear 2 involves a nine-month training programme which 
leads to an expert level of product knowledge, with a specialism in either 
Auto & Leisure or Cycling. Tuition is both through e-learning and face-to-
face training programmes. There are regular refresher courses for Gear 2 
colleagues and a pay award for those who attain this level.

GEAR 3 – Gear 3 colleagues are our Gurus. They are product experts who 
are qualified to train others. They keep their skills and knowledge current 
and market leading - through workshops, attending product and trade 
shows and by linking with and visiting suppliers. Our Gurus also receive 
leadership development and a pay award. 

By the end of FY15 46% of our colleagues had qualified for Gear 2 and 
we had over 300 Gear 3 level colleagues. We anticipate around 80% of 
colleagues being Gear 2 qualified by the end of FY16, along with two Gear 3 
Gurus in most stores.

We are already seeing the benefits of the investment in training. Firstly, 
we have more multi-skilled colleagues. Rather than having one fitter per 
store, we have many colleagues capable of replacing bulbs, wiper blades 
or batteries, or child car seats, enabling us to meet demand. Secondly, we 
are already seeing an uplift in sales metrics, with average transaction value, 
number of items per basket and average gross profit per basket all up 
several percent. Finally, the Net Promoter Score has improved significantly, 
with a final quarter result of 77% compared to 55% two years ago.

+22%

NET PROMOTER SCORE
FY13: 55%  FY15: 77%

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015 
STRATEGIC 
REPORT

Strategy

Operational Review

Retail Strategy — Getting into Gear

Autocentres Strategy

Milestones

Sustainability

12

14

16

18

19

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORT > STRATEGY

OPERATIONAL
REVIEW

“ This was another 
year of strong Retail 
performance, driven by 
our actions to improve 
the product and service 
offer. The results illustrate 
how we’re beginning 
to build a significantly 
enhanced Retail customer 
experience.”

Total Group Revenue

Divisional Sales %

Retail 

85.4%

Autocentres  14.6%

Retail Categories %

Cycling  34.4%

Car Maintenance  32.2%

Car Enhancement   21.6%

Travel Solutions  11.8%

12

A YEAR OF STRATEGIC 
PROGRESS, STRONG SALES 
GROWTH AND IMPROVED 
PROFITABILITY.

The repositioning of Halfords Retail 
to offer an enhanced customer 
experience is now well under way, 
with significant steps taken during 
the year. 

This has resulted in a strong sales performance, 
particularly in Cycling and Car Maintenance, 
as well as further improvements in customer 
feedback scores. Under new leadership, 
Autocentres has a clear strategy centred on 
building trust, and the early signs are encouraging, 
including an improved sales performance through 
the year. There is plenty more to do and FY16 will 
be the busiest year of investment activity under 
our Getting Into Gear Retail plan.

All reference to FY15 performance in this review is 
in respect of the proforma 52 weeks to 27 March 
2015, unless otherwise stated.

SUMMARY OF GROUP RESULTS
Sales of £1,004.9m were up 6.9%, with like-
for-like (“LFL”) revenue growth of 6.8%. Group 
gross margin fell by 40 basis points to 53.2%. 
Total operating costs rose by 5.7% primarily as 
a result of the strong sales volumes, the logistics 
transition and investments made in key areas 
of the business. Investment in the expansion of 
Autocentres continued as the business added  
nine centres (with seven closures, making a net 
addition of two) and in Retail we opened four  
Cycle Republic shops. 

Group earnings before non-recurring items, 
finance costs, depreciation and amortisation 
(“EBITDA”) were up 8.7% to £109.9m. Group 
earnings before finance costs, tax and non-
recurring items (“EBIT”) were £84.6m, which 
compares with £77.8m in the prior year. Profit 
before tax and non-recurring items was £81.1m 
and earnings per share before non-recurring items 
were 32.7p, up 11.4% and 13.8% respectively.  

The cash flow performance was robust with 
increased operating cash flows more than 
offsetting the impact of our capital expenditure 

programme and the Boardman Bikes acquisition. 
Group inventory levels were reduced marginally, 
despite the addition of Boardman Bikes and 
continued strong Retail sales growth. Net debt at 
the end of the year was down £37.8m at £61.8m, 
with a non-lease-adjusted net debt: EBITDA (52 
week) ratio of 0.6:1 versus 1.0:1 in the prior year.

The Board has recommended a final dividend of 
11.0 pence per share (FY14: 9.1 pence) which, 
if approved, would take the full-year dividend 
to 16.5 pence per share. If approved, the final 
dividend will be paid on 28 August 2015 to 
shareholders on the register at the close of 
business on 7 August 2015. The Board continues 
to look to maintain a c.2x dividend cover over the 
medium-term, growing full-year dividends broadly 
in line with earnings per share growth. Based on 
the proposed final dividend, the ratio of interim 
and final dividend payments has moved in line 
with the target of c.30:70.

OPERATIONAL REVIEW: RETAIL
Halfords Retail produced another year of strong 
sales performance with sales up 6.8% to £857.9m. 
LFL growth of 7.0% and online growth of 14.3% 
reflected the improvements made in the range of 
products and brands available, customer-centric 
offers, colleague engagement, and training. 
Weather conditions were favourable for Cycling 
during the summer and for Car Maintenance 
during the fourth quarter but the main driver of the 
better performance has been the actions taken 
by management and colleagues. Cycling was the 
highest growth category with sales up 11.4% and 
continues to be the largest element of Retail sales. 
However, FY15’s performance was more broad-
based with Car Maintenance sales up 8.5% and 
Travel Solutions sales increasing by 5.4%.  

Within Cycling, all elements were in growth. 
Premium Bikes was the standout performer with 
LFL growth of 24.9%, following growth of 29.9% 
in the previous year. Children’s Bikes sales were 
also strong with 13.3% growth, particularly driven 
by older children’s bikes, with sales up 40.5% due 
to an enhanced range and a successful “Does 

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015STRATEGY

Anything Beat a Bike?” Christmas marketing 
campaign. Representing approximately one half 
of premium-cycle sales, Cycle-To-Work revenues 
grew by 15.4%. Sales of Parts, Accessories and 
Clothing (”PACs”) grew by 8%, which was lower 
than we would have liked; it remains an opportunity 
that we are well-positioned and determined to 
take. Shortly after the end of the year we launched 
a range of Boardman clothing. Cycle Repair sales 
were up 17.8% with second-half sales up 27.3%, 
helped by the roll-out of the new operating model, 
which is now in over 400 stores.

The strong performance of Car Maintenance 
products and services was primarily driven by Parts 
and Workshop.  The sale and fitting of bulbs, wiper 
blades and batteries (“3Bs”) again represented 
the largest single element of the category and the 
fitting of these parts grew by 13.6%. Just before 
Christmas the number of 3B fitting jobs exceeded 
100,000 in a single week for the first time and the 
week between Christmas and New Year saw the 
highest ever sales of both batteries and blades, 
helped by the 3-Gears training programme, which 
means we have more multi-skilled colleagues in 
our stores. Workshop sales were aided by the very 
successful Halfords Advanced 200-piece socket 
set, complete with lifetime guarantee.

Car Enhancement LFL revenues decreased by 
0.5%. Sat Nav and Audio sales continued to reflect 
structurally declining markets, but Car Cleaning 
revenues grew by 12.6%, boosted by new gifting 
ranges and a focus on brands of choice.

Travel Solutions LFL revenues increased by  
5.4%, driven by Travel Equipment, due to  
strong product and promotion offers, and Child  
Car Seats, with the investment in training resulting 
in a significant increase in the number of our 
accredited car seat fitters.

Online Retail revenues grew by 14.3% and 
represented 12.2% of total Retail sales (FY14: 
11.3%). The growth was aided by the continual 
developments and enhancements being made 
to the online proposition, as well as an increased 
extended range, with customers now able to 
access around 160,000 products online. The 
importance of our store network and service 
overlay is highlighted by the strength of Click & 
Collect, with over 90% of orders picked up in store. 

Total in-store service income increased to £26.7m, 
with the majority of revenues flowing from 3Bs 
fitting and Cycle Repair.

OPERATIONAL REVIEW: AUTOCENTRES
Total Autocentres revenues were up 7.6% and, on an 
LFL basis, up 5.3%, improving during the year from 
4.3% in the first quarter to 6.6% in the final quarter. 
Gross margin reduced by 109 basis points in the 
year due to the tyre sales mix. Core Service, MOT 
and Repair margins were marginally up in the year. 
Operating costs increased by 6.7%, with the vast 
majority of the increase coming from new centres 

opened in recent years and the balance due to pay 
rises, enhanced training and investments in supporting 
functions. EBITDA increased marginally to £7.6m. 

Nine new Autocentres were opened and seven 
were closed, taking the total number of Autocentres 
locations to 305 at the end of the year. 10-15 new 
centres will be opened in the year ahead and sub-
optimal centres will continue to be closed as a matter 
of course.

HALFORDS BUSINESS REVIEW

RETAIL
Halfords’ mission is to Help and Inspire 
Customers With Their Life on the Move within the 
following categories: Supporting Drivers of Every 
Car, Inspiring Cyclists of Every Age and Equipping 
Families for their Leisure Time. 

Equipping Families for their Leisure Time gives the 
flexibility to extend the range, introduce innovative 
products and leverage space. However, the vast 
majority of management’s focus is currently on 
Supporting Drivers of Every Car and Inspiring 
Cyclists of Every Age as these markets are 
significant and, with strong execution, management 
anticipates sustainable opportunities for growth.  

The Retail strategy, Getting Into Gear, is based 
on the following five elements designed to 
significantly enhance the customer experience:

1.  Service Revolution — up-skilling colleagues’ 
capability to bring about a step change in 
customer service 

2.  The ‘H’ Factor — reasserting the business’ 
proposition authority to Support Drivers of 
Every Car, Inspire Cyclists of Every Age and 
Equip Families for Their Leisure Time

3.  Stores Fit to Shop — investing to raise 

the Halfords store estate to a standard the 
business is proud of   

4.  21st Century Infrastructure — providing 
systems and infrastructure to support 
increasing service and sales levels

5.  Click with the Digital Future — creating a 
service-led, modern digital proposition

On pages 14 and 15 we have set out our 
progress on these five priorities.

AUTOCENTRES
A refreshed Autocentres strategy was launched 
in the year under new leadership, with a focus 
on building trust with our customers. Trust in the 
automotive service and repair sector is key to 
attracting and retaining customers. Investment 
during the year was focused on new centre 
openings, including a new concept trial in Croydon, 
and technology, including the latest diagnostic 
equipment to keep Autocentres at the forefront of 
capability and also a mobile-optimised website with 
online booking capability. The plan also includes 
closer working with the Retail stores. During the 
year Autocentres started using Halfords batteries 

and oil in its centres and running a consistent 
Halfords 5-point winter checks campaign in stores 
and centres. Trust Pilot is used as a measure of 
monitoring the service improvements and as of 
May 2015 this had increased significantly to around 
8.5 out of 10. The early signs are encouraging but 
there remains much to be done.

COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT
We continue to take steps to increase our 
community engagement and have set out our 
progress in a number of case studies throughout 
this annual report. See pages 5, 9, 17 and 36.

CURRENT ACTIVITY
The year ahead will be a busy one, both for 
product developments and further progress under 
the strategic plans in Retail and Autocentres.

In Retail there will be new bike ranges, including 
VooDoo in June, a children’s range in the autumn 
and Boardman in the fourth quarter, as well as 
filling gaps within ranges, including the introduction 
of several premium women’s bikes. During the year, 
we will also re-lay our cycling departments, at the 
same time rationalising the range and refreshing the 
merchandising. Cycling department colleagues will 
receive a face-to-face training course throughout 
the summer, aimed at further equipping colleagues 
with the capability to sell customers the right bike 
and the right accessories. Within Auto, there will 
also be new product launches, including tool sets, 
in-car connectivity solutions and an extended 
range of in-car dash cams. Merchandising 
enhancements, including a wider roll-out of 
electronic vehicle registration look up screens and 
enhanced 3B displays, making product selection 
simpler, will also be implemented.

Also within Retail is the launch of a marketplace 
initiative online. This enables Halfords customers 
to access thousands of additional Auto and 
Cycling products through Halfords.com. These 
products are delivered direct from the vendor to the 
customer, without Halfords needing to hold  
the inventory. 

In Autocentres we remain committed to new 
centre openings, with 10-15 planned for the year, 
along with the commencement of a roll-out across 
the wider estate of the low-cost but high-impact 
learnings from the Croydon concept centre trial. 
In addition, productivity, utilisation and customer 
retention are focus areas.

And the best until last: on behalf of the Board I 
would like to thank all colleagues for their fantastic 
contribution, support and commitment to the further 
progress and strong performance made in Halfords 
this year. It has been a pleasure to work with you 
over the past year. I would also like to welcome Jill 
McDonald, our new CEO, and we all look forward to 
working with her in the years ahead.

Dennis Millard 
Chairman 
4 June 2015

13

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > STRATEGY

RETAIL STRATEGY
GETTING INTO GEAR

FACCAE REPUDAE PERIBUS ET 
SUMMARY OF OUR 
ISQUE ESSINCI LLABORR OVITE 
FIVE RETAIL STRATEGIC 
DERUM QUIAEREM VELECTATU 
PRIORITIES AS WE 
FUGIATIS EUM QUIBUS QUAM.
ENTER THE THIRD 
YEAR OF OUR PLAN.

300 colleagues at Gear 3 level. On top of the 
3-Gears programme we operate management 
development training programmes, “Aspire” and 
“Accelerate”, which helped us to fill around 60% 
of store management vacancies internally.

OUTLOOK
By the end of FY16 we aim to have 80% of 
store colleagues through Gear 2 as well as two 
Gear 3 colleagues per store. We will also turn 
our attention to annual as well as three-month 
colleague turnover.

Offering a significantly enhanced 
retail experience for our customers 
and colleagues is imperative.

In the last two years we have reduced the number 
of store colleagues by around 1,500, but at 
the same time increased the average weekly 
contractual hours worked per colleague from 17 
to 25. We also overhauled the recruitment process 
and launched the 3-Gears training programme. 
All of these are designed to increase colleague 
loyalty, engagement and product knowledge 
and expertise, which in turn leads to improved 
customer service. This has been evidenced by an 
uplift in the net promoter score from 55% in the 
final quarter of FY13 to 77% in FY15. In addition, 
turnover of colleagues within three months of 
joining has reduced from over 20% in FY13 to 
9% by the end of FY15. Our Retail engagement 
score has increased from 64% prior to the 
launch of Getting Into Gear to 81% in April 2015, 
and Halfords climbed to 18th in the 2015 list of 
Sunday Times Best Companies To Work For.

Our 3-Gears training programme continued to 
be rolled out: by the end of FY15 nearly all store 
colleagues had attained Gear 1 accreditation, 
46% had qualified for Gear 2, along with over 

We are ensuring that Halfords has 
the products and services that 
our customers want and that they 
choose us as their number one 
destination to get them.

In order to do this, our products and services in 
Auto, Cycling and Leisure are constantly growing 
and evolving. Within Auto we have launched Car 
Parts Direct, giving customers access to 130,000 
car parts that were previously out of reach through 
Halfords. In Cycling we have launched a new bike 
brand, 13, as well as continuously refreshing and 
updating our ranges, including a new junior range 
within Boardman and relaunching our Carrera 

Our 
5-point retail 
priorities support 
sustainable 
long-term 
growth

“ Halfords’ mission is to help 
and inspire customers with 
their life on the move by: 
Supporting Drivers of Every 
Car; Inspiring Cyclists of 
Every Age and; Equipping 
Families for their Leisure 
Time.”

14

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015STRATEGY

OUTLOOK
We anticipate refreshing a cumulative total of 
around 150 stores by the end of FY16. Additionally, 
the performance of our Cycle Republic stores to 
date has given us the confidence to open around 
11 more by April 2016. 

With changing customer shopping 
habits, online sales are becoming 
an ever increasing proportion of 
our total sales, particularly for 
cycling and technology products.

Since relaunching our website, including a mobile-
enabled version in FY14, we have focused on 
continually upgrading and developing our online 
proposition. During the year this included the 
launch of Click & Collect in Ireland, live chat and 
online number-plate ordering. In November 2014 
we launched an eBay shop, opening up a new 
channel for customers to shop with Halfords, and 
in March 2015 we refreshed the main website 
design, improving the customer journey and 
creating seasonal zones.

Over 90% of our online sales are picked up in 
store, driving footfall into our shops and enabling 
us to showcase our service offers and expertise. 

Our social media presence has been 
strengthened, including an in-house digital 
studio that enables us to keep our YouTube site 
well stocked with product reviews and “how 
to” guides. One of our campaigns, the Bike 
Whisperer, was award-winning during the year.

OUTLOOK
In the year ahead we will commence development 
of a transactional Cycle Republic website as well 
as launching the extended range marketplace. We 
will also be making Halfords stores available as 
locations for customers to pick up parcels ordered 
from other selected retailers, giving us access to a 
new customer base.

Our ability to offer great service 
and products in-store and online is 
built upon a solid infrastructure. 

At the outset of Getting Into Gear we explained 
how we needed to invest in our IT infrastructure. 
The first step was to fix the basics, including an 
upgrade to our SAP system and a consolidation 
of data centres. This has provided a secure 
and stable foundation on which to make further 
improvements and launch new initiatives, such as 
an eBay shop. Tablets were rolled out to all stores 
during the year. 

No child went without their bike over Christmas 
and our website was stable and high customer 
service levels maintained throughout the Cyber 
Weekend peak. FY15 was, however, a challenging 
year for our Warehouse & Distribution function, 
but we have learned a lot and have a medium-
term plan going live in summer 2015 designed 
to maintain high customer service levels whilst 
mitigating future cost increases.

OUTLOOK
The year ahead will see improvements to store till 
hardware as well as a roll-out of electronic vehicle 
registration lookups. Within logistics, we’ll embed 
our medium-term transport solution and review 
the optimal long-term options.

15

brand. The acquisition of Boardman Bikes in June 
2014 gives us the opportunity to leverage the 
brand, as evidenced by the recent launch of a 
Boardman clothing range.

Another key part of “H” Factor, is our growing 
involvement in the wider community, which is 
explained in more detail later in this review.

OUTLOOK
Looking ahead, we will be introducing new ranges 
in children’s bikes, VooDoo and Boardman, as 
well as plugging some range gaps, including 
the introduction of female bikes in both the 13 
and VooDoo brands. Our involvement with the 
women’s cycling Breeze partnership will increase 
and we will teach bike maintenance to even more 
children in stores and in schools. In Auto we are 
launching new products, including a number of 
exclusive branded items, as well as implementing 
an extended range marketplace, which will further 
increase the quantity and range of products 
available to our customers.

Our journey to improve the overall 
Halfords customer experience also 
requires changes to our physical 
footprint.

We have been learning as we progress through our 
refresh programme and we now have a menu of 
options available to apply to stores, ranging from a 
simple “space swap” to a full refresh. By the end of the 
year we had refreshed a total of 72 stores, with positive 
response from customers and colleagues. 41 stores 
received a “space swap”, which involves optimising 
space allocation without changing the look and feel of 
the store, and 405 stores were implanted with the new 
cycle repair operating model, involving dedicated work 
stations, new tools and highly-trained mechanics.

Another part of Stores Fit to Shop is Cycle Republic, 
a new cycling-only store format targeted at the areas 
in which Halfords is under-represented: city centre 
locations, especially London, and the more premium 
and enthusiast sectors of the cycling market. By 
March 2015 we had opened four of these shops.

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.com 
BUILDING OUR AUTOCENTRES 
BRAND IS AN ONGOING 
PROCESS AS WE LEVERAGE 
OUR CAPABILITIES AND 
SCALE TO STRENGTHEN OUR 
RELATIONSHIPS.

We recognise that with any brand, 
trust is key to attracting and 
retaining customers. Our strategy 
to achieve this is four-pronged, 
and at the centre are our people.

Be first choice 
for motorists

Making our Autocentres the first choice for 
motorists across the UK is both the first step and 
the ultimate aim of our strategy.

We want to build a loyal and satisfied customer 
base, and this can be achieved through our scale, 
convenient locations and technical expertise. 
Offering consistent service and pricing, such as 
our single price MOT, will help to position Halfords 
Autocentres as reliable and dependable across 
the nation. We aim to provide an easy online 
booking system, including mobile devices.

Give a service that 
customers come 
back for

While our convenient locations and consistent 
pricing can attract new customers, great service 
is what will keep them coming back. We are 
creating a culture of customer service among 
our colleagues, where their skills, knowledge and 
attitude combine to form great relationships with 
our customers. 

To attract and retain the most passionate 
and skilled colleagues to our autocentres, we 
are focused on improving recruitment and 
engagement. We offer competitive benefits, 
ongoing technical training and are making 
improvements to working conditions. To nurture 
our colleagues’ abilities, we are prioritising training 
and development in line with

STRATEGIC REPORT > STRATEGY

AUTOCENTRES
STRATEGY

“ We want to build a loyal 
and satisfied customer 
base, and this can 
be achieved through 
our scale, convenient 
locations and technical 
expertise.”

R

AGE THE H A L F O
D GROUP C A P

R
E
V
E
L

N
A

R

U

N

T

H

A

A

T

G

R

W

A

E

N

A

S   B R A N D
B I L I T I E S

D

A

BE FIRST C

H
OIC

E

People who
love working
on cars

F

O

R

M

O

T

O

R

I

S

T

S

AT 

R
O
K F

E  A S ERVICE TH
R S CO ME BAC

E

M

O

D

P

R

E P

RIX OPERATION 
ROUD 

G I V
C U S

T

16

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGY

that of the Halfords Retail business. Alongside 
this, our apprenticeship programme is delivering 
colleagues with the values of quality service 
already instilled. Around 200 apprentices are on 
board so far, with more being recruited towards 
the goal of having one in every centre.

In order to continue learning, we regularly review 
feedback from our customers. All our colleague 
incentives are underpinned by customer service 
measures, giving them an extra level of motivation 
to deliver exceptional service. We believe great 
service, delivered by engaged and motivated 
colleagues, who value customer feedback, 
guarantees a loyal and satisfied customer base. 

Run a Grand Prix 
operation that we 
are proud of

Excellent technical service isn’t all our customers 
expect. We want centres we can be proud of, 
offering customers the consistent experience they 
expect from the Halfords brand. That means clean 
and tidy receptions, friendly colleagues willing 
to help and a great environment to wait for their 
vehicle. We want our colleagues to do the best 
job they can and we’ll continue to invest in the 
latest equipment to help them take pride in what 
they do. 

So that we can keep delivering on our goal of 
building trust, we have struck a balance between 
expansion and improvement. We have slowed 
the number of new centres opening in order to 
improve the quality of existing locations. This year 
nine new centres were opened, including a new 
concept centre in Croydon - see more information 
in the box above right.

 Leverage the Halfords 
brand and Group 
capabilities

The strength of the Halfords brand and the wider 
Group capabilities will help to ensure the success 
of our Autocentres. While Retail and Autocentres 
are separate parts of our Group, their capabilities 
are clearly linked, and cross-selling our services is 
a key part of our strategy going forwards.

Offers in common across both Autocentres and 
Retail will be based on our knowledge of each 
customer base, and will encourage customers 
of each to become customers of both. These 
incentives, along with the ability to push our Retail 
products in our Autocentres, can improve the 
performance of the Group as a whole. In the last 
year we introduced Halfords branded batteries 
and lubricants to all Autocentres.

STRATEGIC DELIVERY

CROYDON 
CONCEPT 
CENTRE

In October 2014 Halfords opened a 
concept Autocentre in Croydon. The 
theme of building trust is central to the 
proposition, with large viewing windows 
onto the workshop area, as well as TV 
screens showing technicians undertaking 
work on customers’ vehicles and orange 
customer service pods, where colleagues 
can talk to customers in an open and 
relaxed setting. The overall environment has 
been made attractive to customers, with a 
bright, colourful reception area equipped 
with comfortable seating, refreshments and 
free wifi.

SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS

AUTOCENTRES  
APPRENTICES

The Autocentres apprentice program has 
been running for over 20 years, with more 
and more apprentices being taken on 
each year. There are currently around 200 
apprentices in the business and 100 new 
places have been made available for the 
year ahead, which will be a record intake.  
The aim is to have at least one apprentice in 
every centre by 2018. 

The program is spread over three years 
and consists of blocks of 2-week residential 
courses. By the end of the programme the 
apprentices receive a total of 22 weeks of 
learning and qualify to NVQ level 3. 

The customer and colleague response 
has been excellent and the key elements 
of the concept will be applied to new 
centre openings going forward. There will 
also be a light touch rollout of the lower-
cost, high-impact aspects to the existing 
portfolio of centres over the course of the 
next three years.

There is a graduation ceremony every 
year; the most recent of which saw 36 
apprentices graduate. We are extremely 
proud that the 2014 Apprentice of the 
Year has progressed to the World Skills 
Final and is in a team competing to 
represent the UK at the finals in Brazil 
later this year.

17

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.com 
STRATEGIC REPORT > STRATEGY

MILESTONES

Milestones: colleagues

3-Gears

FY15 Target

c. 50% Gear 2 
qualified

Reduce % of colleagues leaving within three months

< 12%

FY15 Achieved

✔

✔

FY16 Target
c. 80% Gear 2 qualified and two 
Gear 3 colleagues in most stores

maintain FY15 levels

Colleague engagement

not applicable

not applicable

>85%

Milestones: operational

FY15 Target

FY15 Achieved

FY16 Target

Autocentres opened

10 – 15

Annual Part, Accessories and Clothing (PAC) sales growth

20%

Cycle repair sales growth

Improved cycle departments

Stores in a refreshed format

Milestones: customers

25%

180

c. 50

9

8%

18%

✔

✔

10 – 15

20%

25%

already complete

c. 75

Retailer net promoter score

>75%

✔

maintain FY15 levels

Stores working stock outside peak trading hours

majority of stores

no longer applicable*

no longer applicable*

* Since the introduction of more frequent deliveries this is no longer relevant.

FY15 Target

FY15 Achieved

FY16 Target

18

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015STRATEGY

SUSTAINABILITY

MEASURES OF THE IMPACT OF OUR OPERATIONS
We recognise that our business can have a direct, as well as indirect, effect on the environment.  We are committed to understanding any impact that our 
products, stores, Autocentres, support centre and delivery fleet have on the environment. The data presented below allows us to monitor our impact and 
manage it responsibly, making improvements wherever feasible. A great deal has been achieved already, such as the 90% increase in battery recycling and 
40% increase in tyre recycling within our Autocentre business and, like other businesses, we will be undertaking a comprehensive assessment pursuant to the 
Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme in the forthcoming year, which we hope will identify further opportunities for us to continue to mitigate our impact on the 
environment. During the year we increased the frequency of deliveries to our Retail stores in response to an ongoing shift in product mix towards bulkier items, 
changing customer service needs and expectations, and rising online sales. This, combined with high growth in the volume delivered, increased the number 
of deliveries and litres of fuel consumed by our transport operation in the year. One of the benefits from a more frequent delivery schedule is a reduction, over 
time, in the number of deliveries by third party couriers, which will help to offset the increased fuel consumption within our own transport operations. As part of 
the 50:39 store refresh programme we have implemented improved store lighting, and customer facing live displays such as TV screens and VRNs, which help 
to improve the customer’s in store experience and the look and feel of a Halfords store. This has resulted in electricity usage increasing year on year in those 
re-developed stores  

The following table provides measures for the impact of our operations in the financial year. The mandatory data required by the Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013 is included here. Data for all material emissions that are within our operational control and therefore 
our responsibility are included.

Distribution Centre Transport
Kilometres Driven Total1
Litres Fuel
Number of Retail Deliveries 
Volume Delivered 
Efficiency : BFE2 per Load 
Distribution Centre Operations
Units Despatched
Units Received
Bikes Despatched
Bikes Received
E-Fulfilment Orders
E-Fulfilment Units Despatched
Warehouse Pallet Moves
Distance Travelled, Internal MHE3 to the Distribution Centres
Recycling
Distribution Centre Driven Recycling Revenues (cardboard, plastic) 
Tonnes of Car Batteries Recycled by Retail 

2015

2014

9.5m
2.6m
90.5k
830.8k BFE2
46.5 BFE2

71.0m
69.0m
1.3m
1.3m
724k
884k
336.7k
600k miles

7m
1.9m
30.2k
689.5k BFE2
52.6 BFE2

69.5m
68.0m
1.2m
1.5m
350k
580k
467.3k
600k miles

c.£300k
2,825 (equivalent to
 183,000 batteries)
9,306
450,413
1,066,600 litres
87

c.£300k
2,017 (equivalent to 
134,000 batteries)
4,897 
321,445
950,568 litres
84

Car Batteries Recycled by Autocentres
Tyres Recycled by Autocentres
Oil Recycled by Autocentres
% of Autocentres Waste Recycled
Water Consumption
Retail Water Consumption
Autocentres Water Consumption
Global Greenhouse Gas Emissions4
Retail Combustion of Gas
Autocentres Combustion of Gas
Cars on Company Business5
Retail Directly Purchased Electricity
Autocentres Directly Purchased Electricity
TOTAL
Company’s Chosen Intensity Measurement: tCO2E per £1m Group Revenue
1.  This represents the kilometres driven by transport under our direct control and does not include kilometres driven by third-party courier firms. During the year we commenced more frequent 

70,414 m3
46,795 m3
tCO2E
6,636.51
2,219.90
871.78
28,630.46
4,197.51
42,556.16
41.506

7,190.31
3,092.46
850.52 
23,117.81
3,124.54
37,375.64
39.77

71,485.02 m3
42,277 m3 
tCO2E

deliveries to our Retail stores. This increases the kilometres driven by our own delivery fleet, but reduces the number of courier deliveries.

2.  Bulk Flow (picking cage) Equivalent
3.  Mechanical Handling Equipment
4.  Carbon Trust Conversion Factors Energy and Carbon Conversions 2013 update
5.  An estimate based on previous usage, taking as a basis the Average Petrol Car and Diesel Car Carbon Trust Conversion Factors Energy and Carbon Conversions 2013 update.
6.  Based on 53 week period.  

19

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC DELIVERY

CYCLE REPUBLIC

Cycle Republic is a new, cycling-only store format, focused on city 
centre locations, where Halfords has a low market share. Cycle 
Republic aims to offer award-winning bikes at unrivalled value and 
best-in-class servicing and repair, served by colleagues for whom 
cycling is more than just a hobby; it’s their way of life!

Bikes are priced from £200 to £6,000, principally comprising Halfords’ 
own, exclusive brands such as Boardman, 13, Pendleton and Carrera, 
and complemented with brands such as Pinarello, Cinelli, Raleigh, 
Kona and Mongoose. There is a much larger parts, accessories and 
clothing offer than in a Halfords Retail store, with over 1,000 additional 
products stocked in a Cycle Republic shop. Central to the proposition 
is the cycle repair offer. Each of the Cycle Republic stores is equipped 
with new tools, a parts washer and several repair stations, along with 
multiple highly-trained mechanics.

In December 2014 we opened the first Cycle Republic shop in Euston 
Tower, London. By the end of May 2015 there were five shops: 
three in London, one in Norwich and one in Nottingham. Four of the 
shops are brand new premises for Halfords and one, Twickenham, 
is a conversion from a Halfords Retail store. The early signs are 
encouraging and we anticipate having around 15 Cycle Republic shops 
by the end of FY16.

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015 
STRATEGIC  
REPORT

Performance

Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

Chief Financial Officer’s Review

22

25

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORT > PERFORMANCE

SHAREHOLDER 
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

KPI

Definition

Commitment

Performance

Historic Performance

Underlying Profit 
before tax

Measures the normal underlying 
performance of the business after 
removing non-recurring items

Underlying 
Earnings per 
Share

Underlying profits as defined above 
divided by the number of shares in issue

EBITDA

Earnings before Interest, Tax, 
Depreciation and Amortisation

Dividend per 
Ordinary Share

Cash returned to shareholders as 
a return on their investment in the 
Company

The Board considers 
that this measurement 
of profitability provides 
stakeholders with 
information on trends and 
performance.

EPS is a measure of our 
investment thesis and as 
such we aim to manage 
revenues and margins and 
invest in long term growth.

The Board considers 
that this measurement 
of profitability is a viable 
alternative to underlying 
profit and uses this 
measure to incentivise 
management.

To maintain this policy 
whilst retaining the 
flexibility to invest when 
opportunities are identified.

Total Revenues

Total sales revenues from all business 
activities

The Group is committed 
to growing sales in all of its 
core trading activities.

Net Debt

Bank debt plus finance leases, less 
cash and cash equivalents both in-hand 
and at bank

Free Cash Flow

Cash generated from activities, less 
taxation, capital expenditure and net 
finance costs

The Group remains strongly 
cash generative and 
continues to invest in the 
business. The Board is 
committed to maintaining 
an efficient balance sheet, 
returning any surplus 
capital not required to fund 
growth to shareholders.

The Group has a track 
record of robust cash 
generation which the Board 
intends to continue.

Underlying profit grew 
by 11.4% year-on-year 
with the strong sales 
performance reflected in 
improved profitability.

As a result of the increase 
in underlying profit before 
tax EPS rose by 13.8%

EBITDA improved by 8.7%, 
reflecting the improved 
profitability flowing through 
from the strong sales 
growth.

The Board has 
recommended a final 
dividend of 11.0 pence per 
share (FY14: 9.1 pence) 
taking the full year dividend 
to 16.5 pence, an increase 
of 15.4%. The Board will 
continue to maintain a c.2× 
dividend cover over the 
medium term.

Group revenues were up 
6.9% and exceeded our 
£1bn target a year ahead 
of plan.

The Group has continued 
its strong track record of 
operating cash generation.

The Free Cash Flow 
of £66.4m is after the 
Boardman acquisition 
and increased capital 
expenditure as we progress 
through the Getting Into 
Gear plan.

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

£81.1m

£72.8m

£72.0m

£92.2m

£125.6m

32.7p

28.8p

27.7p

33.7p

43.2p

£109.9m

£101.1m

£103.4m

£123.6m

£153.2m

16.5p

14.3p

17.1p

22.0p

22.0p

£1,004.9m

£939.7m

£871.3m

£863.1m

£869.7m

£61.8m

£99.6m

£110.6m

£139.2m

£103.2m

£39.5m

£66.4m

£71.8m

£70.4m

£96.4m

22

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015PERFORMANCE

RETAIL 
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

KPI & Definition

Commitment

Annual Performance

Historic Performance

Like-for-Like Sales
Like-for-like sales represent revenues 
from stores trading for greater than 365 
days and include revenues denominated 
in foreign currencies translated at 
constant rates of exchange

Gross Margin Percentage
Gross Profit expressed as a percentage 
of Sales

We are committed to maximising 
our like-for-like sales opportunities in 
whatever economic environments we 
find ourselves.

Gross Profit is an important indicator of 
the Company’s financial performance. 
Within the business we focus on 
maximising cash generation.

Gross Profit
Gross Profit expressed as GBPs

Retail sales performance in FY15 
was up 7.0% on an LFL basis, with a 
broad-based performance, although 
the Cycling category was the standout 
performer throughout the year with LFL 
growth of 11.4%.

The gross margin declined by 30 
basis points, predominantly due to the 
mix impact of higher sales in Cycling, 
particularly lower-margin Premium 
Bikes, along with growth in third-party 
branded products in Cycling parts, 
accessories and clothing (“PACs”) and 
Car Cleaning.

Underlying EBITDA
Earnings before Interest, Tax, 
Depreciation and Amortisation

The Board considers this measurement 
of profitability a viable alternative to 
underlying profit and uses this measure 
to incentivise management.

EBITDA was up 8.7% year-on-year, 
with the strong revenue growth 
reflected in improved profitability. 

In-store Services
The stores offer a fitting/repair service 
when customers purchase replacement 
products such as car bulbs, windscreen 
wiper blades and batteries (3Bs)

Expert knowledge, advice and service 
remain at the heart of the Halfords 
customer offer, and specifically through 
fitting. This differentiates and defends 
the Halfords offer and generates 
attractive levels of return.

We have invested in our 3-Gears 
training programme and in payroll and 
national marketing to fulfil the demand 
and make more customers aware of 
our unique offer and we increased the 
number of jobs to 4.60m.

In-store Service Income
The sales revenue generated from all 
our fitting and repair services, including 
the sale of Bike Care Plans

Stores Trading in a Refreshed Format
The layout and offering within our 
stores is important as the two formats 
of choice (superstore and compact) 
allow us to reach both large and small 
catchment areas

Expert knowledge, advice and service 
remain at the heart of the Halfords 
customer offer, and specifically through 
fitting. This differentiates and defends 
the Halfords offer and generates 
attractive levels of return.

The majority of this revenue stream 
comprises 3B fitting and cycle repair, 
where sales growth of 14% and 18% 
respectively helped increase total in-
store service income to nearly £27m.

We will continue to review the lines 
available in each of our formats of 
choice, looking to refresh or refurbish as 
appropriate as we believe this enhances 
like-for-like sales growth in these stores.

During the year we continued the store 
refresh programme, creating modern, 
engaging and friendly store environments 
that encourage browsing and interaction 
with colleagues. 

Underlying Costs  
(as a % of sales)
Operating expenses from the Retail 
business activities expressed as a 
percentage of sales

We are committed to an ongoing 
focus on cost control. This ensures 
an efficient use of resources and the 
correct cost base for the prevailing 
economic conditions.

Online Sales  
(as a % of Total Revenue)
Sales enacted via the web, through 
Click & Collect and Direct Delivery

% of Web Customers Visiting Stores
% of online sales using the Click & 
Collect offer and visiting stores after 
researching online

The Internet is changing the way our 
customers shop and provides us 
with new opportunities to grow our 
business. In the last few years we have 
introduced two ways to shop online: 
Click & Collect and Direct Delivery.

Our strategy is to seamlessly integrate 
Halfords.com and our store operations. 
Our research tells us that our customers 
like the convenience of buying online 
but also want to visit our stores for our 
expert advice and value-adding services.

The slight reduction of 90 basis points 
has driven a 5.4% increase in operating 
costs. Costs rose primarily as a result 
of the investment in store colleagues 
and refreshes, higher depreciation, and 
increased distribution costs.

Online sales exceeded £100m for 
the first time, growing by 14.3% 
and reflecting an increase in online 
penetration to 12.2%. A website 
design refresh was completed in 
the year, along with numerous other 
enhancements.

91% of online sales were collected 
in-store, providing opportunities for 
store colleagues to engage with online 
customers.

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

+7.0%

+7.6%

-0.7%

-2.3%

-5.5%

51.5%

51.8%

53.3%

53.1%

54.5%

£442.0m

£416.2m

£397.0m

£399.8m

£420.0m

£102.4m

£93.6m

£94.6m

£114.6m

£144.9m

4.60m

4.46m

3.93m

2.98m

2.54m

£26.7m

£24.4m

£20.7m

£15.2m

£12.4m

72

83

27

20

26

41.9%

42.5%

43.4%

40.8%

38.4%

12.2%

11.3%

10.2%

8.9%

9.2%

91%

91%

88%

86%

85%

23

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > PERFORMANCE

AUTOCENTRE 
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

KPI& Definition

Commitment

Annual Performance

Historic Performance

Like-for-Like Sales
Like-for-like sales represent revenues 
from centres trading for more than 12 
months

We are committed to maximising 
our like-for-like sales opportunities in 
whatever economic environment we find 
ourselves.

Total revenues were up 7.6%, with like-
for-like sales improving from 4.3% in the 
first quarter to 6.6% in the final quarter 
to end the year up 5.3%.

Gross Margin Percentage
Gross Profit expressed as a percentage 
of Sales

Gross profit is an important indicator of 
the Company’s financial performance. 
Within the business we focus on 
maximising cash generation.

Gross Profit
Gross Profit expressed as actual GBPs

Gross profit was up on the prior year 
due to the strong sales performance, 
but margins down down by 109bps due 
to increased tyre sales mix. The margins 
on Service, MOT and Repair work 
improved marginally in the year.

EBITDA
Earnings before Interest, Tax, 
Depreciation and Amortisation

The Board considers that this 
measurement of profitability is a 
viable alternative to underlying profit 
and uses this measure to incentivise 
managements.

As anticipated, EBITDA was up 
marginally year-on-year.

Number of Centres
The number of Autocentre servicing 
centres within the UK

Our research on the geography and 
demographics of the £9bn Car Servicing 
and Repair market and of our local 
catchment sizes shows that there is 
scope for up to 600 autocentres.

We opened 9 new sites in the year, 
including a new concept centre in 
Croydon, and closed 7. We expect to 
open a further 10–15 centres over the 
next financial year.

Jobs per Productive per Week 
(“jpppw”)
Total jobs undertaken by the Centres 
divided by the average number of 
productive technicians and apprentices

Online Bookings
The number of service bookings made 
via halfordsautocentres.com against 
those made direct with the Centres

We aim to increase sales in existing 
centres and make use of spare capacity 
in our technicians. We believe that we 
can continue to raise jpppw without 
needing to obtain more fixed-cost 
labour.

Enhancing our online offer and 
further extending our online presence 
through both Halfords.com and 
halfordsautocentres.com is a Group 
investment priority.

We continue to utilise capacity within 
our centres with additional Service/
Mechanical/Repair work as well as 
growing the tyre mix.

We continue to invest in our online 
presence with a mobile-optimised site 
launched in the year, enabling online 
booking.

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

+5.3%

-0.1%

+7.0%

+6.1%

-0.6%

63.3%

64.4%

63.7%

65.9%

66.0%

£93.1m

£88.0m

£80.1m

£73.0m

£65.0m

£7.6m

£7.5m

£8.8m

£9.0m

£8.3m

305

303

283

260

240

18.3

17.2

16.0

14.7

13.8

321,888

248,465

216,875

199,524

138,954

24

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015PERFORMANCE

STRATEGIC REPORT > PERFORMANCE

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S
REVIEW

FINANCIAL RESULTS

Group Revenue
Group Gross Profit
Group EBIT*
Group EBITDA**
Net Finance Costs
Profit Before Tax and non-
recurring items
Profit Before Tax, after non-
recurring items
Basic Earnings per Share,  
before non-recurring items

53 weeks
ended 
3 April 
2015
£m
1,025.4
546.3
87.6
113.3
(3.5)

84.1

83.8

52 weeks
ended 
27 March 
2015
£m

1,004.9
535.1
84.6
109.9
(3.5)

81.1

80.8

52 weeks
ended 
28 March 
2014
£m
939.7
504.2
77.8
101.1
(5.0)

72.8

72.6

52 week 
change
+6.9%
+6.1%
+8.7%
+8.7%
-29.5%

+11.4%

+11.3%

34.1p

32.7p

28.8p

+13.8%

*   EBIT denotes earnings before net finance costs, tax and non-recurring items
**   EBITDA denotes earnings before net finance costs, tax, depreciation, amortisation and non-recurring items

The FY15 accounting period represents trading 
for the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015 (“the financial 
year”).  The comparative period FY14 represents 
trading for the 52 weeks to 28 March 2014 (“the 
prior year”). We believe that the proforma 52 
week results for FY15 better reflect the underlying 
performance of the business when compared to 
FY14. On this basis all commentary included in 
this report is based on the 52 week period to 27 
March 2015 (“the year”) unless otherwise stated.  

REPORTABLE SEGMENTS
Halfords Group Plc (“the Group” or “Group”) 
operates through two reportable business 
segments:

Total Operating Costs before non-recurring 
items increased to £450.5m (FY14: £426.4m), 
of which Retail represented £359.3m (FY14: 
£341.0m), Autocentres £89.3m (FY14: £83.7m) 
and unallocated costs £1.9m (FY14: £1.7m). 
Unallocated costs represent amortisation charges 
in respect of intangible assets acquired through 
business combinations, namely the acquisition of 
Nationwide Autocentres Limited in February 2010 
and Boardman Bikes in June 2014, which arise on 
consolidation of the Group. 

Group EBITDA before non-recurring items 
increased by 8.7% to £109.9m (FY14: £101.1m), 
whilst net finance costs were £3.5m (FY14: £5.0m).

•	 Halfords Retail, operating in both the UK and 

Republic of Ireland; and

•	 Halfords Autocentres, operating solely in the 

Group Profit Before Tax and non-recurring items 
for the period was up 11.4% at £81.1m (FY14: 
£72.8m).

UK.

All references to Group represent the 
consolidation of the Halfords (“Halfords 
Retail”/“Retail”) and Halfords Autocentres 
(“Halfords Autocentres”/“Autocentres”) trading 
entities. The Group acquired 100% of the ordinary 
shares of Boardman Bikes Limited and Boardman 
International Limited (“Boardman Bikes”) on 
4 June 2014. Since its acquisition Boardman 
Bikes has operated as part of the Retail business 
segment.

FINANCIAL RESULTS
Group revenue in FY15, at £1,004.9m, was up 
6.9% and comprised Retail revenue of £857.9m 
and Autocentres revenue of £147.0m. This 
compared to FY14 Group revenue of £939.7m, 
which comprised Retail revenue of £803.1m and 
Autocentres revenue of £136.6m. Group gross 
profit at £535.1m (FY14: £504.2m) represented 
53.2% of Group revenue (FY14: 53.7%), reflecting 
a decrease in the Retail gross margin of 30 basis 
points (“bps”) to 51.5% and a decrease in the 
Autocentres gross margin of 109 bps to 63.3%.

Net non-recurring costs of £0.3m (FY14: £0.2m) 
during the year represented the net effect of: a 
£0.7m charge in relation to impairment costs to 
support the Stores Fit to Shop initiative; £0.2m 
income from the release of the final balance held 
in relation to the Focus lease guarantee provision; 
and £0.2m income from the release of an excess 
onerous lease provision following the finalisation 
of the exit agreement for the Wembley store. The 
provisions had all been previously charged as 
non-recurring items.

Group Profit Before Tax in the period after non-
recurring items was £80.8m (FY14: £72.6m).

The 53rd week contributed £20.5m to Group 
Revenue and £3.0m to Group Profit Before Tax. 
The week is a significant trading period for the 
Group, representing pre-Easter in Retail and a key 
week of the MOT season in Autocentres.

£81.1m

UNDERLYING GROUP 
PROFIT BEFORE TAX

+13.8%

UNDERLYING BASIC 
EARNINGS PER SHARE

+5.3%
AUTOCENTRES
LIKE-FOR-LIKE

00%
KEY FACT+7.0%

RETAIL
LIKE-FOR-LIKE

25

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > PERFORMANCE

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S
REVIEW continued

HALFORDS RETAIL 

Revenue
Gross Profit
Gross Margin
Operating Costs
EBIT before non-recurring items
Non-recurring income
EBIT after non-recurring items
EBITDA before non-recurring items

Revenue for the Retail business of £857.9m 
reflected, on a constant-currency basis, a like-
for-like (“LFL”) sales increase of 7.0%. Non-LFL 
stores, including three brand new Cycle Republic 
store openings1, contributed £0.5m revenue 
in the year and third-party non-LFL sales from 
Boardman Bikes contributed £2.4m.

Cycling LFL revenues were up 11.4% in the year. 
Premium Bike sales were up 24.9%, reflecting 
the strength of our brands and products, but also 
helped by favourable weather during the summer. 
An improved range and successful Christmas 
marketing campaign combined to drive sales of 
older children’s bikes up 40.5% in the year, with 
Children’s Bikes overall up 13.3%. Cycle Repair 
sales increased by 17.8%, with the level of growth 
improving through the year as the new operating 
model was rolled out.

Car Maintenance LFL revenues increased by 8.5%. 
Parts sales were up 8.2%; the fitting and sale of 
bulbs, blades and batteries (“3Bs”) continued to grow 
strongly. Workshop sales were up 15.2%, supported 
by a reinvigorated customer offer, including a new 
200-piece tool set and the relaunch of the Lifetime 
Guarantee on the Halfords Advanced range. Halfords’ 
authority in Auto was further strengthened by the 
launch of Car Parts Direct in the year.

53 Weeks
ended 
3 April 
2015
£m
875.1
451.1
51.5%
(365.7)
85.4
(0.3)
85.1
105.4

52 Weeks
ended 
27 March 
2015
£m

857.9
442.0
51.5%
(359.3)
82.7
(0.3)
82.4
102.4

52 Weeks
ended 
28 March 
2014
£m
803.1
416.2
51.8%
(341.0)
75.2
(0.2)
75.0
93.6

52 week 
change
+6.8%
+6.2%
-30bps
+5.4%
+10.0%
+50.0%
+9.9%
+9.4%

Car Enhancement LFL revenues decreased by 
0.5%. Audio and Sat Nav sales continued to be 
impacted by structurally-declining markets, with 
sales down 5.4% and 4.0% respectively. This was 
almost wholly offset by Car Cleaning sales, which 
were up 12.6% due to an enhanced range, including 
successful gift packs, and a focus on brands of 
choice, such as Kärcher. 

Travel Solutions LFL revenues increased 
5.4%, with improved merchandising and more 
compelling offers, such as bundle deals on roof 
bars and boxes, driving sales of Travel Equipment 
and Child Car Seats.

Revenues for the Retail business (including 
Boardman Bikes) are split by category below:

Gross profit for the Retail business at £442.0m 
(FY14: £416.2m) represented 51.5% of sales, 
30bps down on the prior year (FY14: 51.8%). The 
reduction in margin was predominantly due to the 
mix impact of higher sales in Cycling, particularly 
lower-margin Premium Bikes, along with growth 
in third-party branded products in Cycling Parts, 
Accessories and Clothing (“PACs”) and Car 
Cleaning.

Management anticipates a further 25-75 bps 
decrease in Retail gross margin in FY16, reflecting 
a continuation of the mix effect and growth in 
third-party branded products. This decline also 
factors in an assumption of continued US Dollar 
strength against Sterling, relative to the prior year.

Cycling
Car Maintenance
Car Enhancement
Travel Solutions
Total

FY15 
(%)

34.4
32.2
21.6
11.8
100.0

FY14
(%)
32.8
31.8
23.1
12.3
100.0

1  Of the four Cycle Republic shops opened in the year, three 

were brand new premises and one was a conversion from an 
existing Halfords Retail store.

26

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015PERFORMANCE

Operating Costs before non-recurring items were £359.3m (FY14: £341.0m). The breakdown is set out below:

Store Staffing
Store Occupancy
Warehouse & Distribution
Support Costs
Total Operating Costs before non-recurring items

Store Staffing costs increased by 7.9%, 
principally due to strong trading volumes leading 
to incremental investment in store hours, along 
with the uplift in the national minimum wage. 
The impact of the 3-Gears training programme 
accelerated through the year as more colleagues 
progressed through Gear 2 and qualified for wage 
uplifts.

Store Occupancy costs decreased by 0.3%. 
Increased depreciation expense and non-
capitalisable store refresh costs, “space swaps” 
and Cycle Republic openings were offset by lower 
net rental charges and other savings, including 
benefits from re-gears and relocations.

HALFORDS AUTOCENTRES

Revenue
Gross Profit
Gross Margin
Operating Costs
EBIT
EBITDA

52 weeks 
Ended
27 March 
2015
£m

99.7
139.3
43.5
76.8
359.3

52 weeks
Ended
28 March 
2014
£m
92.4
139.7
33.7
75.2
341.0

Change
+7.9%
-0.3%
+29.1%
+2.1%
+5.4%

Warehouse & Distribution costs increased by 
29.1%. The cube volume handled through the 
logistics network increased by 18% in the year, 
reflecting the particularly strong growth in sales 
of bulky items. In addition, the number of parcels 
being delivered to stores by courier, rather than 
by fleet, increased by 39% in the first half of 
the year. A more-frequent fleet delivery project 
was launched in October 2014 to mitigate cost 
increases in future years and reduce inventory. 
Initially this project comprised the in-housing of 
the fleet network and a 5-day-a-week delivery 
schedule. Under new logistics management we 
are reviewing the optimal long-term transport 
solution and in the near term are implementing an 
out-sourced 3-day-a-week delivery programme, 
which will go live in the summer.

Support Costs rose by 2.1% and include the one-
off transaction costs and on-going operating costs 
associated with Boardman Bikes, which together 
amounted to £1.1m. Increased depreciation from 
IT investments and annual pay increases also 
contributed to the uplift.

Management anticipates an increase in Retail 
operating costs in FY16 of circa 4 to 5%. 
This comprises: c.1% depreciation; c.1% pay 
increases, including the 3-Gears pay increments; 
c.1% volume-related cost growth, offset by 
targeted savings and; c.1-2% space growth and 
store refurbishment costs, the implementation of 
which is dependent upon continual review and 
evaluation of payback.

53 weeks
ended
3 April 
2015
£m
150.3
95.2
63.4%
(91.1)
4.1
7.9

52 weeks
ended
27 March 
2015 
£m

147.0
93.1
63.3%
(89.3)
3.8
7.6

52 weeks
ended
28 March 
2014
£m
136.6
88.0
64.4%
(83.7)
4.3
7.5

52 week 
change
+7.6%
+5.8%
-109bps
+6.7%
-11.6%
+1.3%

There were no non-recurring items related to the Autocentres business in either year presented.

Autocentres generated total revenues of £147.0m (FY14: £136.6m), an increase of 7.6% on the prior year with a LFL revenue increase of 5.3%. LFL tyre 
revenues increased 15.0% and represented 17.5% of total LFL revenues (FY14: 16.0%). Online-booking revenues grew 19.9% in the year and represented 
16.3% of sales.

Gross profit at £93.1m (FY14: £88.0m) represented a gross margin of 63.3%; a decline of 109 bps on the prior year, driven by higher mix of lower margin 
tyres. The gross margin of Service, Maintenance and Repair work marginally improved.

Autocentres’ EBITDA of £7.6m was 1.3% higher than FY14 (FY14: £7.5m), with the upside in gross profit being offset by continued cost investments as part of 
the on-going growth strategy. EBIT was down 11.6% at £3.8m (FY14: £4.3m), reflecting the increased depreciation expense from recent capital investments.

Management anticipates Autocentres’ EBITDA to increase by a low double-digit % in FY16.

27

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > PERFORMANCE

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER’S
REVIEW continued

PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT 
The Retail store portfolio at 3 April 2015 comprised 467 stores (end of FY14: 465). The following table outlines the changes in the Retail store portfolio over the 
53 week period:

Relocations
Re-gears

Rightsizes
Conversions to Cycle Republic
Openings
Closures

Number

Stores

6
29

5
1
3
1

Penrith, Beckton (from Barking), Nottingham, Workington, Thanet (from Margate) & Dunfermline.
Bangor, Barrow, Bristol Eastgate, Bromley, Carlisle, Charlton, Cheadle, Chesterfield, Chippenham, 
Cirencester, Derby Wyvern, Dunstable, Eastbourne, Ellesmere Port, Godalming, Great Yarmouth, 
Hertford, Horsham, Newcastle, Newcastle Kingston Park, Northwich, Penzance, Plymouth, Southend, St 
Austell, Tottenham, Wolverhampton, Worksop & Yeovil
Perth, Northampton, Bedford, Shirley (Solihull) & Southport
Twickenham
Euston Tower, Margaret Street & Norwich (all Cycle Republic)
Wembley

provision had previously been charged as a non-
recurring item. A final exit agreement in relation 
to the Wembley store was reached in the year, 
resulting in a provision release of £0.2m.

FINANCE EXPENSE
The net finance expense for the year was 
£3.5m (FY14: £5.0m). The prior year expense 
included one-off charges in relation to 
accelerated amortisation of debt issue costs 
and the crystallisation of a number of prior 
period tax computations amounting to £1.0m. 
Lower drawdowns and favourable interest 
rates, following the debt facility refinancing in 
September 2013 and the subsequent amendment 
and extension agreed in November 2014, also 
contributed to the reduced charge.

Management anticipates the net finance expense 
to be around £3.0m in FY16.

TAXATION
The taxation charge on profit for the financial 
year was £18.0m (FY14: £17.1m), including a 
£0.1m charge (FY14: £0.1m) in respect of tax 
on non-recurring items. The full year effective tax 
rate of 21.5% (FY14: 23.5%) was higher than the 
UK corporation tax rate (21.0%) principally due 
to the non-deductibility of depreciation charged 
on capital expenditure and other permanent 
differences arising in the year.

Management anticipates an effective tax rate of 
circa 20% in FY16.

EARNINGS PER SHARE (“EPS”)
Basic EPS before non-recurring items, for the 52 
week period to 27 March 2015, was 32.7 pence 
(FY14: 28.8 pence), a 13.8% increase on the 
prior year. Basic EPS before non-recurring items, 
for the 53 week period to 3 April 2015, was 34.1 
pence (FY14: 28.8 pence), an 18.4% increase on 
the prior year. Basic EPS after non-recurring items 
was 32.5 pence (FY14: 28.6 pence) for the 52 
week period ending 27 March 2015 and 33.8p for 
the 53 week period ending 3 April 2015.

DIVIDEND (“DPS”)
The Board has recommended a final dividend of 
11.0 pence per share (FY14: 9.1 pence), taking 
the full year dividend to 16.5 pence per share. 
If approved, the final dividend will be paid on 28 
August 2015 to shareholders on the register at the 
close of business on 7 August 2015. 

The interim:final dividend ratio has moved to 
33:67 (FY14: 36:64). As previously guided, in 
order to better match dividend payments with the 
operating cash flow profile of the business, this 
ratio will transition to 30:70 over time. 

The Board continues to target broadly 2x dividend 
cover (EPS/DPS).

CAPITAL EXPENDITURE
Capital investment in the 53 week period totalled 
£37.5m (FY14: £30.4m) comprising £30.7m in 
Retail and £6.8m in Autocentres. Consistent with 
prior years, management has adopted a prudent 
approach with regard to capital investment and 
focused on investments generating material 
returns in line with the Getting Into Gear Retail 
strategy and the recently launched Autocentres 
strategy.

Within Retail, £18.5m (FY14: £13.9m) was 
invested in stores, including 45 store refreshes, 
11 of which were also store relocations or right-
sizes, as well as general capital spend relating to 
roofing, flooring and security. By the end of FY15, 
72 stores were trading in a refreshed format in line 
with the Stores Fit To Shop initiative. Retail also 
launched the Cycle Republic brand, converting 
one existing store and opening three dedicated 
stores in the year. Additional investments in Retail 
infrastructure included an £8.7m investment 
in IT systems, such as continual development 
of the online Retail proposition, the new parts 
database trading as Car Parts Direct, the launch 
of a Halfords eBay shop, the relocation of data 
centres and a significant upgrade of the core SAP 
operating system.

In addition to the above changes, a ‘space swap’ 
was implemented in 41 stores during the year.

Nine new Autocentres were opened and seven 
(Bedford, Southport, Moseley, Coventry, Telford, 
Burntwood, Wrexham) were closed in the period, 
taking the total number of Autocentre locations to 
305 as at 3 April 2015 (end of FY14: 303).

With the exception of eight long leasehold and 
two freehold properties within Autocentres, the 
Group’s operating sites are occupied under 
operating leases, the majority of which are on 
standard lease terms, typically with a five to  
15 year term at inception and with an average 
lease length of c.seven years.

Management anticipates opening around 11 Cycle 
Republic stores and 10-15 Autocentres in FY16, 
as well as closing a small number of sub-optimal 
centres.

NET NON-RECURRING EXPENSES
The following table outlines the components of the 
non-recurring expenses recognised in the period:

Asset impairment 
charges
Release of Focus 
lease-guarantee 
provision
Onerous lease 
provision release
Net non-recurring 
expenses

FY15 
£m

FY14
£m

(0.7)

(0.4)

0.2

0.2

 0.2

—

(0.3)

(0.2)

All non-recurring items arose within the 52 week 
period to 27 March 2015.

As part of the Stores Fit To Shop initiative £0.7m 
(FY14: £0.4m) of assets from certain stores were 
impaired in the year.

In FY13 an onerous lease provision of £1.2m 
was created for two Retail stores, reflecting the 
challenging property market for vacant properties 
and the high cost to exit lease agreements. This 

28

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015PERFORMANCE

The £6.8m (FY14: £6.0m) investment in 
Autocentres comprised the opening of nine 
centres in the year (FY14: 23) along with a 
substantial investment in upgraded Autocentre 
diagnostic equipment. We are trialling a new 
concept Autocentre, which opened in Croydon in 
October 2014, and elements of this will begin to 
be rolled out during FY16.

On a cash basis, total capital expenditure in the 
53 week period was £39.6m (FY14: £26.7m).

Management continues to anticipate a capital 
investment of around £100m in Retail and £20m 
in Autocentres in the three-year period ending 
FY16, which indicates c.£45m and c.£8m 
respectively in FY16.

INVENTORIES
Group inventory held as at 3 April 2015 was 
£149.3m (FY14: £150.2m). Retail inventory 
decreased to £147.8m (FY14: £148.8m) and 
includes £1.1m held by Boardman Bikes. 
Autocentres’ inventory was £1.5m (FY14: £1.4m). 
The Autocentres business model is such that 
only modest levels of inventory are held within the 
centres, with most parts being acquired on an 
as-needed basis.

CASH FLOW AND BORROWINGS
Cash generated from operating activities in 
both the 53 week and 52-week periods was 
£142.2m (FY14: £67.5m).  After taxation, capital 
expenditure and net finance costs, free cash 
flow of £66.4m (FY14: £39.5m) was generated in 
both the 53 week and 52 week periods; with the 
increased capital investment and the acquisition of 
Boardman Bikes being offset by improved EBITDA 
and working capital improvements.

As at both 27 March 2015 and 3 April 2015, 
Group net debt was £61.8m (FY14: £99.6m), 
with the non-lease-adjusted 12-month net debt: 
EBITDA ratio at 0.6:1. 

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
The Board considers risk assessment, 
identification of mitigating actions and internal 
control to be fundamental to achieving Halfords’ 
strategic corporate objectives. In the Annual 
Report & Accounts the Board sets out what it 
considers to be the principal commercial and 
financial risks to achieving the Group’s objectives. 
The main areas of potential risk and uncertainty in 
the balance of the financial year are described in 
note 20 of the Annual Report & Accounts. 

These include:

•	 Economic risk

•	 Business strategy risks

•	 Competitive risks

•	 Compliance

•	 Changing customer preferences

•	 Reliance on foreign manufacturers

•	 Product and service quality

•	

Information technology systems and 
infrastructure

•	 Dependence on key management personnel

Specific risks associated with performance include 
Christmas trading as well as weather-sensitive 
sales, particularly within the Car Maintenance and 
Cycling categories in the Retail business.

Andrew Findlay
Chief Financial Officer
4 June 2015

29

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC DELIVERY

STRENGTHENING 
AUTHORITY IN KEY 
CATEGORIES 

One of the key focus areas under the Getting Into Gear strategy has 
been to build and maintain leading positions in our core sectors of 
Auto and Cycling. We have taken a number of steps forward in the 
year including the launch of Car Parts Direct; the introduction of new 
products within Technology and Car Enhancement, including Go Pro 
and dash cams; the launch of our own new premium bikes brand, 13; 
the acquisition of Boardman Bikes and the launch of Cycle Republic. 

We have provided more detail below on two of the initiatives:

CAR PARTS DIRECT
Launched in the first half of the year, Car Parts Direct provides our 
customers with access to over 130,000 car parts that can be ordered 
in-store or online with next working day delivery or better – the majority 
of in-store orders are delivered within 90 minutes. The breadth and 
depth of parts available means that Car Parts Direct can be used 
by garage trade customers as well as capable DIY repairers, hobby 
mechanics and fans of specific vehicle marques. 

ACQUISITION OF BOARDMAN BIKES
In June 2014 Halfords acquired the Boardman Bikes business for  
£14 million. Boardman bikes have been ridden by multiple Olympic and 
world champions and the brand is one of the fastest-growing and most 
successful in UK cycling. Our investment in the business demonstrates 
our growing position as a specialist cycling retailer. Since acquisition, 
we have worked together to launch a range of Boardman clothing and 
look forward to developing the bike and accessories ranges further.

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015 
STRATEGIC  
REPORT

Risk

Risks and Uncertainties

32

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORT > RISK

RISKS AND
UNCERTAINTIES

700,000
NEW DRIVERS
EACH YEAR

00%
KEY FACT#1
UK CYCLE
RETAILER

32

Like all businesses, our Group faces risks and 
uncertainties that could impact the achievement 
of the Group’s strategy. These risks are accepted 
as being a part of doing business. The Board 
recognises that the nature and scope of these risks 
can change and so regularly reviews them as well 
as the systems and processes to mitigate them.

The Corporate Governance report on pages 42 
to 49 describes the systems and internal control 
processes through which the Directors identify, 
assess, manage and mitigate risks.

Senior management colleagues assess risks on a 
department-by-department basis using a variety 
of techniques to identify risk. The likelihood and 
impact of these risks are considered and scored 
against a recognised framework dependent upon 
their effect on the achievement of our corporate 
strategies. Responsibility for taking the necessary 
actions to manage risk is delegated to appropriate 
colleagues in the business, with executive 

manager sponsor involvement. The risk register is 
monitored and updated with current and ongoing 
mitigation on a regular basis.  

Mindful of corporate strategy, executive 
management and the Board consider the risks 
reported within the risk register and review and 
monitor new risks and all mitigating actions to 
ensure that the Group’s appetite for risk is not 
exceeded. The Board recognises that each of 
its strategic pillars (i.e. Supporting Drivers of 
Every Car, Inspiring Cyclists of Every Age, and 
Equipping Families for their Leisure Time) could 
be compromised by any of the risks set out 
below. Individual Getting Into Gear initiatives are 
reliant on some of the mitigations identified. For 
example Service Revolution delivery is reliant on 
full utilisation of our online training system and on 
our ability to attract and retain good colleagues.  
Stores Fit to Shop is reliant on our continuing 
investment in modernisation of our stores.

IDENTIF Y

EV
A

L

U

A

T

E

Our risk
management
process

M

I
T
I
G

ATE

N ALYSE

A

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015RISK

The Group has discussed its risk register with its insurance broker and ensures that it has cover to help to mitigate significant risks where practicable and cost-
effective.

Specific financial risks (e.g. liquidity, foreign currency) are detailed in note 20 to the Annual Report and Accounts on pages 99 to 102.

Key Risks and Uncertainties

Economic, Environmental and Political

Mitigation

The economy is a major influence on consumer spending. Trends in 
employment, inflation, taxation, consumer debt levels, weather and 
interest rates impact consumer expenditure in discretionary areas. 
Changes in Government policies (e.g. Cycle to Work) may also affect our 
customers’ ability to benefit from our products and services.

The Group mitigates these risks by maintaining a focus on the “defensive” 
characteristics of its “needs driven” product groups. A firm focus is 
maintained on cost control. Targeted promotions and excellent service are 
designed to attract and retain customers. We ensure that marketing and 
merchandising can be revised quickly to react to weather conditions.

Business Strategy

The aim of the Group’s business strategy is to deliver long-term value to 
our shareholders. The Board understands that if the strategy and vision 
are inappropriately formulated, communicated, or executed then the 
business will suffer.

The Autocentres and Cycle Republic businesses could fail to meet growth 
expectations.

Competition

The retail industry is highly competitive and dynamic. The Group 
competes with a wide variety of retailers of varying sizes and faces 
competition from UK retailers, in both stores and online, as well as 
international operators. The car servicing market is a service-based 
market with a number of different-sized providers where trust is extremely 
important to customers. Failure to compete with competitors on areas 
including price, product range, quality, service and trustworthiness could 
have an adverse effect on the Group’s financial results.

We also ensure that we have representation with Governmental decision-
makers in the areas supporting our core categories.

The Group has its established “three pillars” strategy.  A retail three-year 
plan (Getting Into Gear) is being executed. Strategic issues, including 
the three-year plan, are regularly reviewed at Board meetings. Regular 
assessment is made to ensure that strategy remains appropriate, and 
that the business is making progress in meeting its strategic objectives.  
KPIs relating to strategy have been communicated clearly, both within 
the business and to the market. These KPIs are regularly discussed by 
the Board. Our budget process recognises the importance of strategic 
initiatives.

Autocentres and Cycle Republic have dedicated, experienced management 
teams supported by appropriate infrastructure and allocated resources.  
The performances of both businesses are closely monitored by the Board.

The Board is aware of the risks faced from UK retailers both in-store 
and online, and from the national car-servicing networks and smaller 
independents. 

We have a significant investment programme to support Getting Into 
Gear. The investment programme is allowing us to improve the service 
we provide to customers by improving the quality of our stores, IT 
infrastructure, training and website (including optimisation for mobile and 
tablet devices). Excellent service is fundamental to differentiating ourselves 
from our competitors.

The national geographical coverage of our stores underpins our Click & 
Collect’ offering. Our wefit service is a key differentiator. Our Cycle Repair 
and extended Parts, Accessories and Clothing range offer confirm our 
credibility within the Cycling market.

The Group seeks to continually strengthen its “own-brand” retail offer and 
develop opportunities to differentiate the Halfords brand, including TV, 
radio, press and social media advertising.

Our Autocentres business continually seeks to provide innovative solutions 
for their customers, such as ‘brakes4life’. 

33

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORT > RISK

RISKS AND
UNCERTAINTIES continued

Key Risks and Uncertainties

Compliance

Mitigation

The Group operates in an environment governed by legislation and codes 
in areas including, but not limited to, listing rules, trading standards, 
advertising, product quality, health and safety, hazardous substances, 
bribery act and data protection.

The Group recognises that failure to comply with ethical standards could 
expose the business to reputational risk and loss of goodwill.

Regulatory requirements are closely monitored by our Company Secretarial 
team which includes colleagues with relevant professional qualifications 
and experience. The Group has Quality Assurance and Compliance teams 
working in both the Retail and Autocentres businesses. Specialist Health 
and Safety teams ensure that the Group has adequate policies and risk 
assessments. Retail margin erosions are minimised by a dedicated profit 
protection team.

Colleagues and management are trained to identify and handle in-store 
regulatory issues using Gears training modules on our online Learning 
Management System. We have a whistleblowing hotline that allows 
colleagues to raise concerns in confidence.

We operate a Code of Conduct that clearly sets out our expectations of 
suppliers. We have a corporate delegated authorities framework (How 
We Do Business) setting out key authorisation levels. Anti-Bribery and 
Corruption training has been delivered through face-to-face and online 
training sessions.

The Group has a dedicated investor relations team which ensures that there 
is frequent and appropriate communication with investors and the wider 
financial community.

The Group has a dedicated corporate social responsibility resource, 
which calls upon cross-functional support as required.  The Group has a 
comprehensive record of community engagement through events such as 
children’s bike workshops, and support of the Re-Cycle charity

Extensive research is conducted into quality and ethics before the Group 
procures products from any new country or supplier. The Group’s strong 
management team in the Far East blends expatriate and local colleagues.  
It understands the local culture, market regulations and risks and we 
maintain very close relationships with both our suppliers and shippers to 
ensure that disruption to production and supply are managed appropriately.

We work with suppliers in a number of territories to reduce the risks of 
disruption.

We maintain firm security and protection measures at our distribution 
centres. We have business continuity plans to manage any incidents 
that may occur. Our logistics are overseen by an experienced, dedicated 
warehouse and logistics team who maintain contacts with a range of 
logistics businesses who could be utilised if necessary.

Supply Chain Disruption

Halfords sources a significant proportion of the merchandise it sells 
in its stores from outside of the UK, either directly or via third-party 
suppliers. Consequently, the Group is subject to the risks associated with 
international trade (particularly those which are common in the import of 
goods from developing countries) including, but not limited to, inflation, 
currency fluctuation, the imposition of taxes or other charges on imports, 
the exposure to different legal standards, the burden of complying with 
a variety of foreign laws and changing foreign government policies and 
natural disasters.

The Group could also be impacted in the event of disruption to domestic 
logistic arrangements; for example, unavailability of distribution centres or 
road transport problems.

34

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015RISK

Key Risks and Uncertainties

Mitigation

Product and Service Quality and Brand Reputation

The Board recognises that the quality and safety of both our products 
and services in our stores and autocentres are of critical importance and 
that any major failure will affect consumer confidence and our reputation. 
Failure to protect the Group’s reputation and brand could lead to a loss of 
trust and confidence. This could result in a decline in the customer base 
and affect the ability to recruit and retain good people. There is also the 
risk that our service proposition fails due to inconsistent levels of service 
at individual stores and individual centres.

Information Technology (“IT”) Systems and Infrastructure

In common with most businesses, Halfords is dependent on the reliability 
and suitability of a number of important IT systems where any sustained 
performance problems (including those caused by cyber attack) could 
potentially compromise our operational capability for a period of time 
impacting on stores, centres or warehouse, multi-channel and distribution 
systems. With ambitious growth plans for our multi-channel offer, our 
trading capacity could be affected by internal and external systems’ 
resilience and interdependencies.

Commercial data could be lost or stolen through cyber attack, sabotage, 
or other security breaches.

Dependence on Key Management Personnel

The success of the Group’s business depends upon its senior 
management closely supervising all aspects of its business, in particular, 
the operation of the stores and autocentres, including the appropriate 
training of in-store and centre colleagues, and the design, procurement 
and allocation of merchandise. 

The Group constantly seeks to enhance its position as the store or centre 
of first choice in each of the markets that it serves. 

Our Gears training programme uses online modules to ensure that 
colleagues are consistently knowledgeable about our products and able 
to deliver quality services to customers. This online training is reinforced 
by face-to-face learning and assessments. Stores use an accreditation 
matrix to ensure that all building and fitting is undertaken by competent 
colleagues. Product knowledge among colleagues is promoted through 
specialist conferences for selected staff (e.g. BikeHut managers). We have 
also implemented measures to ensure that we attract and retain the best 
colleagues: engagement surveys aim to identify opportunities to reduce 
colleague turnover; we have again been recognised as one of the Sunday 
Times “25 Best Big Companies to Work For”; our recruitment processes 
are now centralised to improve efficiency and consistency.

Our products are risk assessed and rigorously tested for quality and safety 
by qualified engineers in our dedicated quality team. We monitor customer 
comments and complaints and, when necessary, we have established 
recall processes.

Our autocentres utilise a comprehensive quality assurance process with 
checks by centre managers. Technicians are regularly checked to ensure 
quality of workmanship, and the priority status allocated to individual jobs 
is reviewed to ensure safety and prevent overselling. There is a dedicated 
Operations Quality team. We utilise mystery shoppers.

Extensive controls are in place to maintain the integrity of our systems and 
to ensure that systems changes are implemented in a controlled manner. 
Halfords’ key trading systems are hosted within a secure data centre 
operated by a specialist company remote from our support centre. These 
systems are also supported by a number of disaster recovery arrangements 
including a comprehensive backup strategy, and a hotlink secure data 
centre hosted in a different location. IT recovery processes are tested 
regularly. We have successfully completed an upgrade of our core SAP 
system.

We have recently thoroughly reviewed our IT security processes and risk 
assessments and recruited a number of specialists to the IT team, including 
dedicated IT security and continuity experts. We utilise appropriate firewalls, 
physical and logical system access controls. We have undertaken network 
penetration testing.

Our remuneration policy outlined on page 58 details the strategies in 
place to ensure that high calibre executives are attracted and retained. 
The Group looks to improve its senior manager cadre through operating a 
talent management process to help individuals achieve their full potential 
within Halfords and to ensure that appropriate succession plans are in 
place to meet the future needs of the business. At a junior level, the Group 
continues to invest in graduate programmes and store and centre colleague 
training and development.

35

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

CYCLE EVENT 
SUPPORT

Halfords has also again been confirmed as the Official Mechanics 
Partner for the 2015 Sky Ride Big Bike series, spanning 15 events 
nationwide and supporting over 100,000 cyclists this summer. These 
free one-day events offer cyclists of all ages and abilities the chance 
to ride their bike on traffic-free streets or on cycle paths and parks in 
the heart of towns and cities across Britain. Halfords cycle mechanics 
will be a key part of the day, keeping cyclists on the move by assisting 
with essential adjustments, cabling and tube replacements. In addition 
to the Sky Rides Halfords will also be providing mechanical support 
at many more events including Mitie London Revolution, Deloitte Ride 
Across Britain, and Women V Cancer Ride The Night.

SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS 

SCHOOL DONATIONS

In November 2014, Halfords announced a new scheme to donate 
cycling equipment to primary schools in disadvantaged areas. In 
its first year, the new scheme will donate children’s bikes and new 
bike helmets to schools in the eight cycling cities of Manchester, 
Leeds, Birmingham, Newcastle, Bristol, Cambridge, Oxford and 
Norwich. Schools are invited to apply at www.halfordscompany.com/
responsibility/community .The bikes are collected from the trade-in 
events held at Halfords stores and reconditioned by trainees at the 
Cycle Repair Academy in Onley Prison.

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015OUR  
GOVERNANCE

Board of Directors

Directors’ Report

Corporate Governance Report

Nomination Committee Report

Audit Committee Report

Remuneration Committee Report

38

39

42

50

52

56

IMAGE 
PLACEMENT

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015BOARD OF
DIRECTORS

DENNIS MILLARD
Chairman

N R

JILL McDONALD
Group Chief Executive

N

ANDREW FINDLAY
Chief Financial Officer

Dennis has been Chairman of the Group since  
28 May 2009. His former appointments include Chief 
Financial Officer of Cookson Group plc, Finance 
Director of Medeva plc and Premier Farnell plc.

He has broad commercial and financial 
experience in the retail, service, distribution 
and manufacturing sectors in the UK and 
internationally. Dennis is a member of the South 
African Institute of Chartered Accountants and 
holds an MBA from the University of Cape Town.

He is also Non-Executive Deputy Chairman 
and Senior Independent Director of Pets at 
Home Group Plc and holds the roles of Senior 
Independent Director and Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee at Debenhams plc.

Jill was previously CEO, UK & President, North 
West Division, Europe for McDonald’s Corporation. 
Her responsibilities at McDonald’s encompassed 
around 3,300 owned and franchised restaurants 
across seven countries, more than 500 franchisees 
and over 200,000 colleagues. Jill began her career 
in 1987 at Colgate Palmolive and joined British 
Airways in 1990, where she worked for 16 years.

She brings outstanding business leadership, 
particularly with regard to customer service and 
colleague engagement in a consumer facing 
business. She is a Non-Executive Director for 
Intercontinental Hotels Group plc.

Prior to his appointment, Andrew was Director of 
Finance, Tax and Treasury at Marks and Spencer 
Group plc. Prior to this, he held senior finance 
roles at the London Stock Exchange and at Cable 
and Wireless, both in the UK and US. Andrew 
qualified as a chartered accountant with Coopers 
& Lybrand.

Andrew has a track record in retail and other 
competitive, consumer and business facing 
industries. Andrew has experience of: operational 
and commercial finance; refinancing and pension 
scheme funding; bid defence; non-merchandise 
procurement; shared services; financial 
accounting, tax and audit.

DAVID ADAMS
Senior Independent Director

A N R

CLAUDIA ARNEY
Independent Non-Executive Director

A N R

HELEN JONES
Independent Non-Executive Director

A N R

Helen is currently a senior executive at Caffé 
Nero. Helen was the CEO of the Zizzi Restaurants 
group and was also responsible for successfully 
launching the Ben & Jerry brand in the UK and 
Europe.  

Helen brings valuable and relevant marketing 
and branding experience in consumer focused 
businesses.

David was Finance Director and Deputy Chief 
Executive of House of Fraser plc until 2006, then 
Executive Chairman of Jessops plc, becoming 
Non-Executive Chairman in 2007. In addition, he 
has held several Executive and Non-Executive 
roles in over 25 years in retailing including 10 
years as a plc Finance Director.  

David is currently Chairman of Conviviality Retail 
plc, Ecovision Ltd, Park Cameras Ltd and Walk 
the Walk (a breast cancer charity) and is Senior 
Independent Non-Executive Director and Chair 
of the Audit Committee at Hornby plc and Non-
Executive Director and Chairman of the Audit 
Committee at Fevertree Drinks plc.

Claudia was previously the Group Managing 
Director, Digital at EMAP until late 2010. Prior to 
this she was Director of the Enterprise and Growth 
Unit at HM Treasury. She has also worked as an 
Executive Director at Goldman Sachs, FT.Com 
and Mckinsey, and was Managing Director 
of TheStreet.co.uk. Claudia brings extensive 
experience of strategy formulation and business 
development.  

Claudia is Chairman of Public Data Group, Deputy 
Chairman of Telecity Group PLC, and a Non-
Executive Director of Derwent London Plc and 
the Premier League.  She is also a member of the 
Advisory Board of the Shareholder Executive. 

KEY TO COMMITTEE MEMBERSHIP

N

Nomination Committee

A

Audit Committee

R

Remuneration Committee

38

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015OUR GOVERNANCE > BOARD OF DIRECTORSGOVERNANCE > DIRECTORS’ REPORT

DIRECTORS’
REPORT

The Directors present their report and the audited financial statements of Halfords Group plc (the “Company”) together with its subsidiary undertakings 
(the “Group”) for the period ended 3 April 2015.   

HALFORDS GROUP PLC

Registered Number
Registered Office Address
Country of Incorporation
Type

04457314
Icknield Street Drive, Washford West, Redditch, Worcestershire, B98 0DE
England and Wales
Public Limited Company

SUMMARY OF GENERAL DISCLOSURES (INCORPORATED INTO THIS DIRECTORS’ REPORT)
The following information required to be disclosed in this Directors’ Report has been provided by the Company: 

Disclosure

The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities within the Chief Financial Officer’s Report.

The Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial 
instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk within Note 20 to the Group Financial Statements.

The Statement of Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code and description of the Group’s corporate governance framework 
within the Corporate Governance Report.

A summary of how the Company recognises its responsibility to its colleagues, customers, environment, and community through various 
initiatives (case studies being on pages 5; 9; 10; 17 and 36) and within the Sustainability Report.

The Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities in respect of the Annual Report and the Financial Statements.

Board of Directors

Directors’ Report including interests and indemnities

Auditor

Going Concern

Political Donations

Share Capital, Major Shareholders and Authority to Purchase Shares

AGM

Leadership
  Role of the Board
  Board Composition and Meeting Attendance

Effectiveness
  Composition of the Board
  Skills and Experience

Independence

  Diversity
  Appointments to the Board
Induction and Development

  Evaluation
  Re-election
  Directors and their Other Interests
  Board Committees
  Nomination Committee

Accountability
  Audit Committee

Internal Control and Risk Management

Remuneration 

Relations with Shareholders

Audit Committee Report

Remuneration Committee Report

STOCK CODE: HFD
halfords.annualreport2015.com

Page

25 to 29

99

40 to 49

19

71

38

39 to 41

40

40

41

41

41

43 to 48

43 to 49

46 to 49

46

49

52 to 55

56 to 70

39

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015SHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCE 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
Directors have a statutory duty to avoid situations in 
which they have, or may have, interests that conflict 
with those of the Company unless that conflict is first 
authorised by the Board.  

DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THE 
AUDITOR
In accordance with Section 418(2) of the Companies 
Act 2006, each Director in office at the date the 
Directors’ Report is approved confirms that: 

The Company has in place procedures for 
managing conflicts of interest. The Company’s 
Articles of Association contain provisions to allow 
the Directors to authorise potential conflicts of 
interest, so that if approved, a Director will not be 
in breach of his/her duty under company law. In 
line with the  requirements of the Companies Act 
2006, each Director has notified the Company of 
any situation in which he or she has, or could have, 
a direct or indirect interest that conflicts or possibly 
may conflict, with the interests of the Company (a 
situational conflict). Directors have a continuing duty 
to update any changes to their conflicts of interest.

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES
Directors’ and Officers’ insurance cover has been 
established for all Directors and Officers to provide 
cover against their reasonable actions on behalf of 
the Company. The Directors of the Company and 
the Company’s subsidiaries have the benefit of a 
third-party indemnity provision, as defined by section 
236 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s 
Articles of Association.

AUDITOR
The Company’s Auditor is KPMG LLP. A resolution 
proposing the reappointment of KPMG LLP is 
expected to be in the notice of the AGM and will be 
put to shareholders at the meeting.

i.  so far as the Director is aware, there is 

no relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware; and 

ii.  he/she has taken all the steps that he/she ought 
to have taken as a Director in order to make 
himself or herself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information.

GOING CONCERN
With effect from 14 November 2014 the ultimate 
holding company, Halfords Group plc, completed 
an amend and extend of its previously secured 
four-year £200m revolving credit facility (with an 
option to extend for a further year). The arrangement 
now consists of a £170m five-year revolving 
credit facility, ending in November 2019.  At the 
year end, the Group had undrawn borrowing 
facilities of £117m (2014: £114m). The Group’s 
current committed borrowing facilities contain 
certain financial covenants, which have been met 
throughout the period. The Group’s forecasts and 
projections, taking account of reasonably possible 
changes in trading performance, show that the 
Group should be able to operate within the level 
of its borrowing facilities and covenants for the 
foreseeable future. As a consequence, the Directors 
believe that the Group is well placed to manage its 
business risks successfully, despite the uncertain 
economic outlook. The Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group has adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future, hence they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting in preparing the 
Financial Statements.

OUR GOVERNANCE > DIRECTORS’ REPORT

DIRECTORS’
REPORT

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES
The principal activities of the Group are: the retailing 
of automotive, leisure and cycling products from 
retail stores and car servicing and repair from 
Autocentres. The principal activity of the Company is 
that of a holding Company. The Company’s registrar 
is Capita Asset Services, which is situated at The 
Registry, 34 Beckenham Road, Beckenham, Kent 
BR3 4TU.

PROFITS & DIVIDENDS
The Group’s results for the year are set out in the 
Consolidated Income Statement on page 77. The 
profit before tax on ordinary activities was £83.8m 
(2014: £72.6m) and the profit after tax amounted 
to £65.8m (2014: £55.5m). The Board proposes 
that a final dividend of 11.0 pence per ordinary 
share be paid on 28 August 2015 to shareholders 
whose names are on the register of members at the 
close of business on 7 August 2015. This payment, 
together with the interim dividend of 5.5 pence per 
ordinary share paid on 23 January 2015, makes a 
total for the year of 16.5 pence per ordinary share. 
The total final dividend payable to shareholders for 
the year is estimated to be £21.4m. 

Computershare Trustees (Jersey) Limited, trustee of 
the Halfords’ Employee Share Trust, has waived its 
entitlement to dividends.

PERFORMANCE MONITORING 
The delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives is 
monitored by the Board through KPIs and periodic 
review of various aspects of the Group’s operations. 
The Group considers that the KPIs listed on pages 
22 to 24 are appropriate measures for the delivery 
of the strategy of the Group via its Retail and 
Autocentres divisions.

DIRECTORS
The following were Directors of the Company during 
the period ended 3 April 2015 and, unless otherwise 
stated, at the date of this Annual Report:

Dennis Millard 
Matt Davies (resigned 30 April 2015) 
Andrew Findlay 
David Adams 
Claudia Arney 
Helen Jones 
Bill Ronald (resigned 31 May 2014) 
Keith Harris (resigned 31 May 2014)

In accordance with the Company’s Articles of 
Association and the UK Corporate Governance 
Code guidelines, all those persons holding office  
as a Director of the Company on 3 April 2015 will 
retire and offer themselves for re-election at the 
2015 AGM.  Jill McDonald, who was appointed 
on 11 May 2015, will stand for election for the first 
time.

40

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015COLLEAGUES
The Group strives to meet its business objectives 
by motivating and encouraging its employees to 
be responsive to the needs of its customers and 
continually improve operational performance. 

The Group is committed to providing equality of 
opportunity to employees and potential employees. 
This applies to recruitment, training, career 
development and promotion for all employees, 
regardless of physical ability, gender, sexual 
orientation, religion, age or ethnic origin. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment applications 
by disabled persons wherever suitable opportunities 
exist, having regard to their particular aptitudes and 
abilities. Training and career development support 
is provided where appropriate. Should a colleague 
become disabled, efforts are made to ensure 
their continued employment with the Group, with 
retraining being provided if necessary.

The Group has established a framework of colleague 
communications, including a monthly magazine, to 
provide colleagues with information on matters of 
concern to them and business performance, as well 
as to encourage the engagement of every colleague 
in the Board’s commitment to high standards of 
customer care and service provision.

A whistleblowing policy and procedure enables 
colleagues to report concerns on matters affecting 
the Group or their employment, without fear of 
recrimination. In addition, the Group takes a zero-
tolerance approach to matters of discrimination, 
harassment and bullying in all aspects of its business 
operations, including in relation to gender, race, 
national origin, disability, age, religion or sexual 
orientation. Appropriate policies and procedures are 
in place for reporting and dealing with such matters.

POLITICAL DONATIONS
The Group made no political donations and incurred 
no political expenditure during the year (FY14:nil).  It 
remains the Company’s policy not to make political 
donations or to incur political expenditure, however 
the application of the relevant provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006 is potentially very broad 
in nature and, as last year, the Board is seeking 
shareholder authority to ensure that the Group does 
not inadvertently breach these provisions as a result 
of the breadth of its business activities, although the 
Board has no intention of using this authority.

SHARE CAPITAL
Details of the Company’s share capital, including 
changes during the year in the issued share capital 
and details of the rights attaching to the Company’s 
ordinary shares, are set out in Note 21 on page 102. 
All ordinary shares, including those acquired through 
Company share schemes and plans, rank equally 
with no special rights. 

All shareholders are entitled to attend and speak 
at the general meetings of the Company, appoint 
proxies, receive any dividends, exercise voting rights 
and transfer shares without restriction. There are no 
known arrangements that may restrict the transfer of 
shares or voting rights.

The Company has term and revolving credit facilities 
that require the Company in the event of a change 

of control to notify the facility agent and, if required 
by the majority lenders, these facilities may be 
cancelled. The Company does not have agreements 
with any Director or employee that would provide 
compensation for loss of office or employment 
resulting from a takeover, except that provisions of 
the Company’s share schemes and Deferred Bonus 
Plan may cause options and awards granted to 
Directors and employees under such schemes and 
plans to vest on a takeover.

Rules relating to the appointment or removal of the 
Directors, and their powers, are contained within 
the Company’s Articles of Association, which in 
accordance with legislation can only be changed 
with shareholder approval.

MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS
As at 1 June 2015, the Company’s register of substantial shareholdings showed the following interests of 3% 
or more of the Company’s issued ordinary shares. 

Holder
Artemis Investments Management LLP
J O Hambro Capital Management Limited
Schroders Plc
Legal & General Investment Management Limited
Rathbone Brothers Plc
Invesco Limited
Norges Bank Investment Management 
BlackRock Investment Management Limited

Number of 
shares
26,978,462
10,700,558
8,512,484
7,772,556
7,510,079
6,550,590
6,462,138
6,257,960

% of issued 
shares
13.55
5.38
4.28
3.90
3.77
3.29
3.25
3.14

AUTHORITY TO PURCHASE SHARES
At the 2014 AGM, shareholders approved a special resolution authorising the Company to purchase a 
maximum of 19,906,322 shares, representing less than 10% of the Company’s issued share capital at 1June 
2014, such authority expiring at the conclusion of the AGM to be held in 2015 or, if earlier, on 30 September 
2015.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The AGM will be held at the Hilton Garden Inn, 1 Brunswick Square, Brindley Place, Birmingham  
B1 2HW on Thursday 30 July 2015. The notice of the AGM and explanatory notes regarding the special 
business to be put to the meeting will be set out in a separate circular to shareholders. 

By order of the Board

Justin Richards
Group Company Secretary
4 June 2015

41

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
REPORT

“ Good corporate 
governance is a 
key element of our 
business success.” 

9,000
CUB SCOUTS 
TAUGHT BIKE 
MAINTENANCE

100,000
00%

CYCLISTS 
KEY FACT
SUPPORTED BY
HALFORDS’
MECHANICS

CHAIRMAN’S 
INTRODUCTION

My primary role is to lead the 
Board and ensure that it works 
effectively and collaboratively 
to create sustainable, long-term 
shareholder value. 

Good corporate governance is a key element 
of our business success. The Board is therefore 
committed to ensuring that high standards 
of governance, values and behaviours are 
consistently applied throughout the Group. These 
elements are critical to business integrity and 
maintaining investors’ trust in Halfords. 

The Board has recently welcomed the new Chief 
Executive Officer, Jill McDonald, following the 
resignation of Matt Davies. Jill joined the Company 
from the McDonald’s Corporation, where she 
was CEO, UK & President, North West Division, 
Europe. She brings to the Board a wealth of 
experience from successfully heading a large 
complex service-led consumer facing business. 

The Board very much looks forward to working 
with her and the Executive Team, providing 
appropriate guidance and independent thought 
and challenge for the sustainable delivery of the 
Group’s long term strategy.

The following Corporate Governance Report 
contains a summary of the Company’s 
governance arrangements and the regulatory 
assurances required under the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 2012. 

I would encourage you to attend this year’s AGM 
and meet me and the Board.

Dennis Millard 
Chairman 
4 June 2015

42

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015THE BOARD

KEY MATTERS RESERVED FOR 
BOARD APPROVAL

GROUP STRATEGY AND RISK 
MANAGEMENT
•	 Approval of the Group’s Strategy and 

BOARD MEMBERSHIP AND 
COMMITTEES
•	 Appointment of Directors
•	 Approval of the fees of the  
Non-Executive Directors

Business Plan

•	 Setting of Board Committees’ Terms of 

•	 Approval of changes to capital structure
•	 Approval of any decisions to cease to 
operate all or any material part of the 
Group’s business.

•	 Approval of extension of activities into 
new businesses or geographical areas

FINANCIAL AND INTERNAL CONTROLS
•	 Oversight of risk management and 

internal control framework

•	 Approval of financial statements and 

results announcements

•	 Approval of shareholder communications, 

circulars and Notices of Meetings
•	 Approval of the Auditor’s remuneration 

and terms of engagement 

•	 Recommendation and declaration of 

dividends

•	 Approval of major capital expenditure 

projects

•	 Approval of material contracts

Reference 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
•	 Undertaking formal performance reviews 
of the Board, Committees and individual 
Directors

•	 Determining the independence of Directors
•	 Receiving reports on Group policies, such 
as health and safety, risk management 
strategy, the environment and charitable 
and political donations

Read more about the remit of each 
Committee on pages 50 to 70.

See Committee Terms of Reference at  
www.halfordscompany.com/investors/
governance/our-committees

s
e
i
t
i
r
o
h
t
u
A
d
e
t
a
g
e
l
e
D

EXECUTIVE 
DIRECTORS 
AND SENIOR 
MANAGMENT

THE
BUSINESS

How We Do Business is the internal name of the 
formal delegated authorities document  approved 
by the Board. It describes how day-to-day 
decisions are delegated to the  Executive Directors, 
the Senior Management Team and others within 
the business.  Each potential activity is set out 
by reference from whom approval must be 
sought and the paperwork required to evidence 
that approval. Where an activity is not  expressly 
described within How We Do Business, approval 
must be sought from the  Senior Management 
Team, who will apply the principles of How We 
Do Business to the  decision. The implementation 
of the document is constantly monitored, with 
updates proposed to the Board to reflect changing 
practices or structures. Briefing sessions were held 
for all relevant Support Centre colleagues upon 
launch and are refreshed whenever the document 
is updated. 

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE WITH UK 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE
Responsibility for good governance lies with the 
Board. The Board is accountable to shareholders 
and is committed to the highest standards of 
corporate governance as set out in the UK 
Corporate Governance Code 2012 (the “Code”). 
The Code can be found on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at www.frc.org.uk. The Board 
considers that throughout the period ended  
3 April 2015, the Company has complied, without 
exception, with the provisions of the Code. 

This report outlines how the Board has applied 
the main principles of good governance set out in 
the Code during the period under review. 

LEADERSHIP 
BOARD COMPOSITION 
The Board is committed to ensuring that it provides 
leadership to the business as a whole, having 
regard to the interests and views of its shareholders 
and other stakeholders. It is also responsible for 
setting the Group’s strategy, values and standards. 
Details of the Group’s business model and strategy 
can be found on pages 6 to 18.

The roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer 
are separate and clearly defined, with the division 
of responsibilities set out in writing and agreed by 
the Board. The definitions of the roles are available 
at: www.halfordscompany.com/investors/
governance/division-of-responsibilities-between-
the-chairman-and-chief-executive-officer. 

As at the date of this report, the Board of Directors 
was made up of six members, comprising the Non-
Executive Chairman, two Executive Directors and 
three Non-Executive Directors. The composition 
of the Board is as set out on page 46 and the 
biographies of individual Directors, including any 
other business commitments, are available on 
page 38 and also at www.halfordscompany.com/
investors/governance/the-board.

The Directors together act in the best interests of 
the Company via the Board and its Committees, 
devoting sufficient time and consideration as 
necessary to fulfil their duties. Each Director 
brings different skills, experience and knowledge 
to the Company, with the Non-Executive Directors 
additionally bringing independent thought and 
judgement. This combination seeks to ensure that 
no individual or group unduly restricts or controls 
decision-making. 

Each of the Non-Executive Directors (excluding 
the Chairman) is considered independent of 
management and free of any relationship that 
could materially interfere with the exercise of 
their independent judgement. The Chairman was 
considered independent upon his appointment. 
The Board considers that each Non-Executive 
Director brings their own senior level of 
experience, gained within their field. 

43

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCE 
OUR GOVERNANCE > CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
REPORT continued

BOARD RESPONSIBILITIES
The key responsibilities of Board members are set out below:

Role

Chairman of the Board

Main Responsibilities
•	 Leadership of the Board including its operation and governance

•	 Builds an effective and complementary Board

•	 Sets the agenda, style and tone of Board discussions

•	 Facilitates and encourages active engagement in meetings, promoting effective relationships and open communication

•	 Ensures effective communications with shareholders and other stakeholders 

Group Chief Executive

•	 Develops the Group objectives and strategy for Board approval

•	 Creates and recommends to the Board an annual budget and five year financial plan

•	 Successfully delivers against the financial plan and other objectives and executes the agreed Group strategy

•	

Identifies and executes new business opportunities and potential acquisitions or disposals

•	 Manages the Group’s risk in line with the Board approved risk profile

Senior Independent 
Director

•	 Supports the Chairman in his role

•	 Holds meetings with the other Non-Executive Directors without the Chairman at least once a year to appraise the 

Chairman’s performance

•	 Acts as an intermediary for the other Directors or as a sounding board for the Chairman if required

•	 Available to other Directors and shareholders with concerns that cannot be addressed through the normal channels

Non-Executive Directors, 
including the Chairman

•	 Evaluate and appraise the performance of Executive Directors and Senior Management against agreed targets

•	 Participate in the development of the strategy of the Group

•	 Monitor the financial information, risk management and controls processes of the Group to make sure that they are 

sufficiently robust

•	 Meet regularly with senior management

•	 Periodically visit retail stores, Autocentres and distribution centres

•	 Meet together regularly without the Executive Directors present 

•	 Formulate Executive Director remuneration and succession planning

Company Secretary

•	 Works closely with the Chairman, Group CEO and Board Committee Chairmen in setting the rolling calendar of agenda 

items for the meetings of the Board and its committees

•	 Ensures accurate, timely and appropriate information flows within the Board, the Committees and between the Directors 

and senior management

•	 Provides advice on Board matters, legal and regulatory issues, corporate governance, Listing Rules compliance  

and best practice

A formal schedule of matters reserved for the 
Board is in place and regularly reviewed.  This 
is available at: www.halfordscompany.com/
investors/governance/matters-reserved-for-the-
board. 

To effectively discharge these responsibilities, the 
Board has additionally implemented a system 
of delegated authorities, which is described on 
page 43. This enables the effective day-to-day 
operation of the business and ensures that 
significant matters are brought to the attention 
of management and the Board as appropriate. It 

is through this system that the Board is able to 
provide oversight and direction to the Executive 
Directors, the Senior Management Team and the 
wider business. 

Matters Reserved for the Board include: 
Authority; Strategy and Management; Structure 
and Capital; Investor Relations; Audit, Financial 
Reporting and Controls; Nominations to the 
Board; Executive Remuneration and Significant 
Contracts. 

BOARD MEETINGS AND ATTENDANCE
The table opposite shows the attendance of 
Directors at the meetings of the Board and 
of the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration 
Committees during the year ended 3 April 2015. 
Where a Director did not attend meetings owing 
to prior commitments or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he or she provided input to the 
Chairman so that his or her views were known.

44

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015BOARD ATTENDANCE AT SCHEDULED MEETINGS 

Board Member

Executive Directors

Matt Davies

Andrew Findlay

Non-Executive Directors

Dennis Millard

David Adams

Claudia Arney

Helen Jones

Bill Ronald

Keith Harris

Board
Scheduled: 12

Audit
Committee
Scheduled: 4

Remuneration
Committee
Scheduled: 8

Nomination
Committee
Scheduled: 2

10   12

12   12

12   12  

12   12

12   12

12   12

1   2

1   2

3  

4  

4  

4   4

4   4

4   4

1   1

1   1

4  

n/a

8   8

8   8

8   8

8   8

1   2

1   2

1   2  

n/a

2   2

2   2

2   2  

2   2  

n/a

n/a

Number of meetings available to the individual

Number of meetings attended by the individual

Number of meetings invited to attend for whole or part of the meeting

Other members of the Senior Management Team 
and advisors attended Board meetings by invitation 
as appropriate throughout the year. The Board also 
held a two-day Strategy meeting during the period. 

At each Board meeting, the Chief Executive 
Officer delivers a high level update on business, 
before the Board moves to considering specific 
reports, reviewing business and financial 
performance, key initiatives, risks and governance. 
In addition, throughout the year the Senior 
Management Team and other colleagues deliver 
presentations to the Board on proposed initiatives 
and progress on projects.

BOARD COMMITTEES 
The Board Committees are the Audit Committee, 
the Nomination Committee and the Remuneration 
Committee. Specific responsibilities have been 

delegated to each. Each Committee has its 
terms of reference approved and regularly 
reviewed by the Board. The terms of reference 
for the Committees are available on www.
halfordscompany.com/investors/governance. On 
the following pages each Committee Chairman 
reports how the Committee he/she chairs 
discharged its responsibilities in FY15 and the 
material matters that were considered. 

Following each meeting of a Committee, the 
Committee Chairman reports to the Board. Whilst 
not entitled to attend, other Directors, professional 
advisers and members of senior management 
attend when invited to do so. The Auditor attends 
Audit Committee meetings by invitation. No 
person is present at Nomination Committee or 
Remuneration Committee during discussions 

pertinent to them. The Company Secretary acts 
as the secretary to each Committee.

A Disclosure Committee, made up of a minimum 
of two Directors, approves the final wording of 
market announcements prior to release. There 
were five Disclosure Committees during the 
period.

The day-to-day treasury needs of the Group are 
managed by the Treasury Committee, chaired by 
the CFO and whose other members are senior 
members of the finance and treasury teams.

The Board may establish other ad hoc 
committees of the Board to consider specific 
issues from time to time. No such committees 
were formed during the year. 

45

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
REPORT continued

HALFORDS BOARD
The Board is the principal decision-making forum for the Group, setting the strategic direction and ensuring that the Group manages 
risk effectively. The Board is accountable to shareholders for financial and operational performance.

See page 44 for examples of Matters Reserved for the Board. A complete list is available on the company’s website  
www.halfordscompany.com

NOMINATION COMMITTEE
Key Objectives: 
To ensure that the Board has the 
skills, knowledge and experience 
to be effective in discharging 
its responsibilities and to have 
oversight of all governance matters  

Main Responsibilities
Making appropriate recommendations 
to maintain the balance of skills 
and experience of the Board by 
considering:

•	

the size, structure and composition 
of the Board;  and

AUDIT COMMITTEE
Key Objectives: 
To provide effective governance 
over the Group’s financial reporting 
processes including the internal 
audit function and external Auditor 
and to maintain oversight of the 
Group’s systems of internal control 
and risk management activities

Main Responsibilities 
The Audit Committee’s responsibilities 
include:

•	 making recommendations to the 

Board on the appointment/removal 
of the external Auditor, the terms of 
engagement and fees;

•	 Senior management succession 

•	

plans, retirements and 
appointments of additional and 
replacement Directors.

More information on diversity in the 
Group can be found on pages 41  
and 51

Read more within the Nomination 
Committee Report on page 50

reviewing and monitoring the 
integrity of the Company’s financial 
statements, including its annual 
and interim reports and preliminary 
results announcements and any 
other formal announcement relating 
to its financial performance, and 
then recommending the same to 
the Board;

•	 assisting the Board in achieving 
its obligations under the Code in 
areas of risk management and 
internal control; and

•	

focusing particularly on compliance 
with legal requirements, accounting 
standards and the Listing Rules.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
Key Objectives: 
To ensure that a Board policy exists 
for the remuneration of the CEO, 
the Chairman, other Executive 
Directors and members of the 
executive management.

Main Responsibilities
The Remunerations Committee’s 
responsibilities include:

•	

•	

recommending to the Board 
the total individual remuneration 
package of Executive Directors 
and members of the executive 
management; 

recommending the design of the 
company share incentive plans 
to the Board, approving any 
awards to Executive Directors and 
other executive managers under 
those plans and defining any 
performance conditions attached 
to those awards;

•	 determining the Chairman’s fee, 

following a recommendation from 
the CEO; and

•	 maintaining an active dialogue 
with institutional investors and 
shareholder representatives

Read more within the Audit Committee 
Report on page 52

Read more within the Remuneration  
Committee Report on page 56

Chair:
Dennis Millard

Members:
David Adams
Claudia Arney
Helen Jones
Matt Davies1

Chair:
David Adams

Members:
Claudia Arney
Helen Jones

Chair:
Claudia Arney

Members:
David Adams
Dennis Millard
Helen Jones

1.  Represents the Committee at the close of period. 
Since the close of the period, Matt Davies has 
resigned and Jill McDonald, successor CEO, has 
replaced him on the Committee.

The Nomination, Audit and Remuneration  Committees’ full Terms of Reference are 
available on the Company’s website or on request from the Company Secretary

46

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015 
 
CONCERNS
The Chairman seeks to resolve any concerns 
raised by the Board, whether raised in a Board 
meeting or in another forum. Where raised and 
unresolved in a Board meeting, the unresolved 
business can be recorded on behalf of a Director 
in the minutes of the relevant meeting. A resigning 
Non-Executive Director would also be able to raise 
any concerns in a written letter to the Chairman, 
who would bring such concerns to the attention 
of the Board. No such concerns have been raised 
throughout the period.

EFFECTIVENESS
INDEPENDENCE
The Independent Non-Executive Directors bring 
a wide range of experience and expertise to the 
Group’s affairs and carry significant weight in 
the Board’s decisions. The Independent Non-
Executive Directors are encouraged to challenge 
management and help develop proposals on 
strategy. In compliance with the requirements of 
the Code for at least half of the Board, excluding 
the Chairman, to be independent, the Company 
confirms that 60% of its Board are independent. 

The Board considers David Adams, Claudia 
Arney and Helen Jones to be independent in 
character and judgement in accordance with the 
requirements of the Code. The Chairman, Dennis 
Millard, was considered independent on his 
appointment.

SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE OF THE BOARD — MOVING US THROUGH THE GEARS
The below graphic illustrates the number of Directors on the Board who have the relevant skills and experience listed to the right.

6

5

£
£

£

5

5

5

6

6

6

4

4

3

6

6

* Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories.

Represents the Board at the close of the period.

Leadership

Strategy

Governance

Marketing

Cross-
Functional

Banking

£
£

£

Finance

Corporate

Retail

Digital

Customer
Services

Business Development
Brand Building

Supply Chain

47

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
REPORT continued

Diversity1

Balance of Non-Executive Directors:
Executive Directors

● Chairman
● Executive Directors
1
● Non-Executive Directors

01
02

03

Male:Female
4:2

2

Length of tenure
0-3 years: 2

3-6 years: 4

1.  Represents the Board at the close of the period. Bill 
Ronald and Keith Harris retired during the period on  
31 May 2014. 

2.  Since the close of the period and the date of this report, 
Matt Davies has resigned as CEO and been superseded 
by Jill McDonald, making the gender ratio 3:3.

DIRECTORS’ INDUCTION TRAINING

DIVERSITY
The Board considers that it is the background 
and experience brought to the Board by each 
individual that best secures and demonstrates 
its diversity. The principle that candidates are 
considered “on merit and against objective 
criteria, and with due regard for the benefits 
of diversity on the Board, including gender” is 
established in the Terms of Reference of the 
Nomination Committee. 

No fixed quota is applied to decisions regarding 
recruitment, rather the Nomination Committee 
considers capability and capacity to commit the 
necessary time to the role in its recommendations 
to the Board. The intention is the appointment 
of the most suitably-qualified candidate to 
complement and balance the current skills, 
knowledge and experience on the Board, seeking 
to appoint those who will be best able to help lead 
the Company in its long-term strategy. Following 
Jill McDonald’s appointment, 50% of the Board is 
female, already exceeding the EU’s 2020 guideline 
of 40%. 

The Board is well-placed by the mixture of skills, 
experience and knowledge of its Directors to 
act in the best interests of the Company and its 
shareholders. 

APPOINTMENTS TO THE BOARD
At the end of April, Matt Davies resigned as 
the Group Chief Executive Officer after two 
and a half years on the Board.  As reported 

Briefings

Operation and 
Organisation 
site visits

Key
Initatives

Strategic
Aims

Directors’
Induction
Training

Meetings 
with Company 
Directors
and Senior
Executives

Operational
and 
Organisational
Structure

Assistance

48

in the Nomination Committee’s report, a 
thorough search was conducted to identify 
suitable candidates, both internally and 
externally to succeed him in this role. Upon the 
recommendation of the Nomination Committee, 
Jill McDonald joined the Board on 11 May 2015 
as Chief Executive Officer. Jill was formerly CEO, 
UK & President, North West Division, Europe for 
McDonald’s Corporation.  She brings with her 
significant corporate, operational and brand 
management experience.

Succession planning is not, however, confined 
to the Board itself and the Board pays a close 
interest in identifying and cultivating leaders of the 
future from within the business.

DIRECTORS’ INDUCTION 
All new Directors receive an induction tailored 
to their individual requirements, to include 
briefings on the activities of the Group and visits 
to operational sites. They also meet all of the 
Company’s other Directors and Senior Executives. 
This facilitates their understanding of the Group 
and the key drivers of the business’ performance. 
Jill McDonald is currently undertaking a full 
induction programme as prepared by the 
Chairman, with the assistance of the Company 
Secretary. Upon joining she was provided with 
background materials covering the operational 
and organisational structure of the business, as 
well as the strategic aims and key initiatives of the 
Company. Over the coming two months she will 
hold one-to-one meetings with all members of the 
Senior Management Team, as well as undertaking 
extensive Retail store, Autocentre and distribution 
centre visits, meeting colleagues from across the 
Group. 

TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
All current Directors have various opportunities for 
on-going development and support via:

•	 A programme of Support Centre, distribution 
centre, Retail store and Autocentre visits;

•	 Reviews with the Chairman to identify any 

training and development needs;

•	 Advice on governance, relevant legislative 

changes affecting the business or their duties 
as Directors from the Company Secretary; 

•	 Access to independent professional advice at 

the Company’s expense; and 

•	 Membership of the Deloitte Academy, a 

training and guidance resource for boards and 
directors.

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015 
EVALUATION
It is important to regularly review the effectiveness 
of the Board and its Committees. Despite 
undertaking an external review in the last period, 
the Company decided to repeat the exercise, 
engaging the services of an external facilitator, 
Lintstock Limited. Owing to changes within the 
make-up of the Board, the decision was taken to 
delay slightly, performing the assessment in April 
2015. 

The assessment considered topics under the 
headings:

•	 Board Composition, Expertise & Dynamics;

•	 Time Management;

•	 Board Support;

•	 Board Committees;

•	 Strategic Oversight; 

•	 Risk Management and Internal Control;

•	 Succession Planning; and

•	 Priorities for Change.

Following this review, the Chairman is satisfied 
that the Board and its Committees are performing 
effectively and that there is the appropriate 
balance of skills, experience, independence 
and knowledge of the Group to enable the 
Directors to discharge their respective duties and 
responsibilities effectively. The Board will continue 
to take proactive steps to address recommended 
improvements. 

The three most significant actions to be taken as a 
result of the assessment are set out below:

•	 Following the change of the CEO and 
forthcoming change of the CFO, the 
composition of the Board and its Committees 
and the background and expertise of their 
members will be reviewed, to ensure that they 
have the appropriate expertise to deliver the 
Group’s strategy; 

•	 The Board will develop new innovative ways 

of considering and setting future strategy and 
direction; and

•	 The NEDs will meet more frequently, without 

the Executives, through a series of scheduled 
formalised meetings.

RE-ELECTION
In compliance with the Code and the Company’s 
Articles of Association, all Directors on the Board 
as at 4 June 2015, will seek re-election at the 
Company’s AGM. Jill McDonald will seek election 
for the first time. 

DIRECTORS AND THEIR OTHER INTERESTS
Each Director is required to notify the Company 
of any situation in which he or she has, or could 
have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, 
or possibly may conflict, with the interests of the 
Company (a situational conflict). None was notified 
during the period. 

All Directors are aware of the need to consult 
with the Company Secretary should any 
possible situational conflict arise, so that prior 
consideration can be given by the Board as to 
whether or not such conflict will be approved.

risks and mitigating actions were appropriate 
to the level of risk that was both acceptable to, 
and incumbent within, a listed business. More 
information on the Company’s key risks and 
uncertainties is shown on pages 32 to 35. 

Details of the Directors’ service contracts, 
emoluments, the interests of the Directors and 
their immediate families in the share capital of the 
Company and options to subscribe for shares 
in the Company are shown in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 70.

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS
The Board is committed to effective 
communications between the Company and 
its shareholders and, accordingly, has a strong 
Investor Relations programme that seeks to 
actively engage with shareholders. 

INTERNAL CONTROL AND RISK 
MANAGEMENT
Overall responsibility for the system of internal 
control and reviewing its effectiveness rests with 
the Board. This involves ensuring that there is 
a process to identify, evaluate and manage any 
significant risks that may affect the achievement of 
the Group’s strategic objectives. 

The Board has conducted an annual review of the 
effectiveness of the systems of internal control 
during the year, under the auspices of the Audit 
Committee. The Audit Committee provides the 
Board with an independent assessment of the 
Group’s financial position, accounting affairs 
and control systems. In addition, the Board 
receives regular reports on how specific risks 
that are assessed as material to the Group are 
being managed. For further information on the 
Company’s compliance with the Code provisions 
relating to the Audit Committee and Auditor 
please refer to pages 52 to 55. 

The risk management and internal control system 
is designed to manage, rather than eliminate, the 
risk of failing to achieve business objectives and 
can provide only reasonable, and not absolute, 
assurance against material misstatement or 
loss. The Board’s policy on internal control 
is implemented by management through a 
clearly defined operating structure with lines of 
responsibility and delegated authority. 

An on going process for identifying, evaluating and 
managing the significant risks faced by the Group 
and assessing the effectiveness of related controls 
has been established by the Board to ensure an 
acceptable risk/reward profile across the Group. 
The process has been in place throughout the 
period ended 3 April 2015, and up to the date 
of approving the Annual Report and Financial 
Statements. 

Our process for identifying, evaluating and 
managing the significant risks faced by the Group 
and assessing the effectiveness of related controls 
routinely identifies areas for improvement, but the 
Board has neither identified nor been advised of 
any failings or weaknesses that it has determined 
to be material or significant.

The Board considered its appetite for risk in 
relation to the top 30 risks, determining that the 

This programme includes formal presentations of 
full year and interim results. These presentations, 
along with the Annual Report and Accounts, 
are the primary means of communication during 
the year with all of the Company’s shareholders. 
Additionally, the Chairman, the Chief Executive 
Officer and the Chief Financial Officer have met 
with analysts and institutional shareholders during 
the period to keep them informed of significant 
developments and help maintain a balanced 
understanding of their issues and concerns. 
Their views and feedback, as well as market 
perceptions gathered, are regularly communicated 
to the Board via a monthly report by the Investor 
Relations Officer. The Company Secretary also 
brings to the attention of the Board any material 
matters of concern raised by the Company’s 
shareholders, including private investors.

The primary method of communication with 
shareholders is by electronic means, helping to 
make the Company more environmentally friendly. 
Information available on the Company’s website 
includes current and historic copies of the Annual 
Report and Accounts, full and half-year financial 
statements, market announcements, corporate 
governance information, the Terms of Reference 
for the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration 
Committees and the Matters Reserved for the 
Board. 

The Annual General Meeting gives all shareholders 
the opportunity to communicate directly with the 
Board and their participation is welcomed. The 
Chairmen of the Remuneration, Nomination and 
Audit Committees will be present at the AGM 
and will be in a position to answer questions 
relevant to the work of those Committees. It is 
the Company’s practice to propose separate 
resolutions on each substantial issue at the AGM. 
The Chairman will advise shareholders on the 
proxy voting details at the meeting. 

By order of the Board

Justin Richards 
Group Company Secretary 
4 June 2015

49

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > NOMINATTION COMMITTEE REPORT

NOMINATION COMMITTEE
REPORT

Halfords.com

ALMOST
00%
90 million
KEY FACT
VISITS

CHAIRMAN’S 
LETTER

The past year was a significant 
and busy year for the Committee. 
In addition to its key responsibility 
of ensuring that an effective Board 
and Committees are in place, the 
Committee oversaw the process 
for the appointment of the Group’s 
new Chief Executive Officer, Jill 
McDonald.

I was delighted when Jill agreed to join the 
Group and take up the role of CEO and I am 
certain that she will bring new perspective to the 
Board, based on her professional and personal 
experience.  

Additional information on the activities of the 
Committee, including the details of the process 
leading to the appointment of the new CEO and 
the services provided by Egon Zehnder, executive 
search agency, are set out in this report.

There were two meetings held during the year 
and, after each Committee meeting, I reported to 
the Board on the key issues discussed during the 
meeting.  A number of informal discussions were 
also held between Committee members and me. 

The Committee’s terms of reference are available 
on the Company’s corporate website www.
halfordscompany.com.

Dennis Millard 
Nomination Committee Chairman 
4 June 2015

50

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015LOOKING AHEAD
In the year ahead, the Nomination Committee will 
continue to assess the Board composition and 
how it may be enhanced. It has also embarked 
upon the search for a replacement for Andrew 
Findlay, the Chief Financial Officer, who will leave 
the Company in October 2015.

DIVERSITY
The Committee and the Board have sought 
to ensure that appointments are of the best 
candidates to promote the success of the Group 
and are based on merit, with due regard for the 
benefits of diversity on the Board (while also 
meeting the requirements of the Equality Act 
2013). We previously made a commitment to 
further strengthen gender diversity amongst the 
workforce and, further to this commitment, the 
Board appointed Jill McDonald as the Group’s 
new CEO, bringing the percentage of female 
Board members to 50%. This exceeds the EU’s 
guideline of 40% female Board representation by 
2020.

The Company does not currently publish specific 
diversity targets but in practice, it has created a 
more balanced Board and Executive Management 
Team and continues to work to ensure this is 
replicated across the entire business, in particular 
in relation to gender diversity.

Further information regarding diversity Board can 
be found on page 48.

COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Dennis Millard (Chairman)
Jill McDonald (joined 11 May 2015)
David Adams 
Claudia Arney
Helen Jones 
Matt Davies (resigned 30 April 2015)
Bill Ronald (resigned 31 May 2014)
Keith Harris (resigned 31 May 2014)

The Committee’s role is to review the size and 
structure of the Board, consider succession 
planning and make recommendations to the 
Board on potential candidates for the Board. 
Its key objective is to ensure that the Board 
comprises individuals with the necessary skill, 
knowledge and experience to ensure that the 
Board is effective in discharging its responsibilities. 

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES
The Committee’s focus during the year was 
overseeing the process for the appointment of 
a new CEO, following Matt Davies’ resignation. 
The Committee set out the types of skills and 
attributes it envisaged a new CEO would possess, 
which it captured in its briefing to executive search 
agency, Egon Zehnder, which identified potential 
candidates for the role.  Committee members 
interviewed candidates for the role and thereafter 
recommended the recruitment of Jill McDonald to 
the Board. 

51

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

AUDIT COMMITTEE
REPORT

DASH CAM
SALES UP
740%
IN Q4

FOLDING 
00%
BIKES
KEY FACTUP 26%

YEAR-ON-YEAR

CHAIRMAN’S 
INTRODUCTION

I am pleased to present the report 
of the Audit Committee for the 
financial year ended 3 April 2015.

Throughout the year, the Audit Committee has 
continued its work of reviewing the effectiveness 
of Halfords’ corporate governance framework 
with particular emphasis on the quality of financial 
reporting, internal control, and risk management 
systems. This report explains in detail how the 
Committee undertook its duties.

We are now entering the third full year of our 
in-house internal audit programme. The internal 
audit function and its audit universe-driven review 
programme have matured well and our risk 
management processes are embedded within the 
operations of the business.

Looking to the financial year beginning in 
April 2015, the business recognises the new 
requirements being introduced by the new UK 
Corporate Governance Code (issued September 
2014). The Audit Committee has already 
discussed these new requirements and has a 
clear plan to address them. 

David Adams 
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
4 June 2015

52

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015•	 approving a formal whistleblowing policy 

whereby staff may, in confidence, disclose 
issues of concern about possible malpractice 
or wrongdoings by any of the Group’s 
businesses or any of its employees without 
fear of reprisal, and includes arrangements to 
investigate and respond to any issues raised.

The Audit Committee has reviewed its Terms of 
Reference and its composition during the year 
and believes that both are approriate.  Copies 
of the full Terms of Reference are available on 
the Company’s website or on request from the 
Company Secretary.

REMIT
The Audit Committee’s responsibilities include:

•	 making recommendations to the Board on the 
appointment of the external Auditor, including 
on effectiveness, independence, non-audit 
work undertaken (against a formal policy) and 
remuneration;

•	

•	

reviewing the accounting principles, policies 
and practices adopted throughout the period;

reviewing and approving external financial 
reporting for adoption by the Board;

•	 assisting the Board in achieving its obligations 
under the Code in areas of risk management 
and internal control, focusing particularly 
on compliance with legal requirements, 
accounting standards and the Listing Rules;

•	 ensuring that an effective system of internal 

financial and non-financial controls is 
maintained; and

MEMBERSHIP AND REMIT OF THE 
AUDIT COMMITTEE
MEMBERSHIP
All of the members of the Audit Committee are 
independent Non-Executive Directors. Having 
been the Deputy Chief Executive and Finance 
Director of House of Fraser Plc, David Adams 
is considered by the Board to have recent and 
relevant financial experience and so the requisite 
experience to chair the Committee.  Each of the 
other independent Non-Executive Directors has, 
through their other business activities, significant 
experience in financial matters. 

The Chairman, Executive Directors and key 
advisors are invited to attend meetings as 
appropriate in order to ensure that the Committee 
maintains a current and well-informed view of 
events within the business, and to reinforce 
a strong risk management culture. The Audit 
Committee meets according to the requirements 
of the Company’s financial calendar. The 
meetings of the Audit Committee also provide the 
opportunity for the independent Non-Executive 
Directors to meet without the Executive Directors 
present and to raise any issues of concern with 
the Auditor. There have been three such meetings 
in the period ended 3 April 2015 and nothing of 
note was reported.

53

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

AUDIT COMMITTEE
REPORT continued

PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES DURING THE YEAR

The Audit Committee met four times during 
the year with the following timetable:

Board for Approval

•	 Review of External Auditor’s Half-Year Report

MAY 2014
•	 Review of Year End Chief Financial Officer’s 

•	 Review of Internal Audit Progress Report

•	 Approval of External Auditor Non-Audit 

Report

Fee Policy

•	 Recommend the Preliminary Statement to 

•	 Review of Committee Terms of Reference

the Board for Approval

•	 Recommend the Annual Report to the 

Board for Approval

•	 Review of External Auditor’s Report

•	 Review Statement of External Auditor’s 

Independence

•	 Review of Internal Audit Full Year Report

•	 Review of Group Register of Risks and 

Controls

•	 Approval of Internal Audit Charter

OCTOBER 2014
•	 Review of Half Year Chief Financial Officer’s 

Report

FEBRUARY 2015
•	 Review of External Auditors Annual 

Strategy and Fees

•	 Approval of Amendments to Internal Audit 
and Risk Management Frameworks in 
Response to Sep 14 Revision of Corporate 
Governance Code

•	 Review of Impact of FRS101

MARCH 2015
•	 Review of Internal Audit Progress Report 

and Annual Strategy

•	 Review of Group Register of Risks and 

Controls

•	 Recommend the Interim Statement to the 

•	 Review of Group Whistleblowing Policy

LOOKING AHEAD
For the financial year beginning in April 2015, the Committee plans to further augment its risk 
management oversight through regular management briefings explaining in detail how selected 
key areas of business risk are managed.  These presentations will be prioritised to reflect 
emerging external issues, but are likely to feature topics such as cyber security and supply  
chain safeguarding.

SIGNIFICANT ISSUES IN RELATION TO 
THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
In order to discharge its responsibility to 
consider accounting integrity, the Committee 
carefully considers key judgements applied in 
the preparation of the consolidated financial 
statements that are set out on pages 76 to 112. 
The Committee’s review included consideration of 
the following key accounting judgements:

IMPAIRMENT OF GOODWILL ASSOCIATED 
WITH  AUTOCENTRES
Following the acquisition of Nationwide 
Autocentres in 2010, the Group holds significant 
goodwill in the Halfords Autocentres business. 
There are a number of factors that could impact 
on the future profitability of the business (e.g. loss 
of key customer, change in market behaviour) and 
there is therefore a risk that the business may not 
meet the growth projections necessary to support 
the carrying value of the intangible asset (see note 
10 of the financial statements).

The Audit Committee has received detailed 
reports from Halfords’ finance team and external 
Auditor addressing this issue. Consideration has 
been given to ensuring that cash flow models, 
discount rates, sensitivity analysis and centre 
profitability are all reasonable. The Committee 
concluded that it is satisfied with the accounting 
treatment of impairment of goodwill.  

VALUATION OF INVENTORY WITHIN THE 
RETAIL DIVISION
With the business holding a wide range of 
stock, it is likely that changing consumer 
demands will mean that some lines cannot be 
sold, or will be sold at below the carrying value. 
Provisions are made to reflect this.  Given the 
difficulties in forecasting market trends, there 
is a risk that inventory provisions made will 
may be inappropriate or incomplete (see note 
13 of the financial statements).  Management 
has an established methodology for assessing 
inventory provisions. Range reviews are regularly 
undertaken to ensure that all discontinued 
inventory is identified.

The Audit Committee has received detailed 
reports from Halfords’ finance team and external 
Auditor addressing this issue. After consideration 
of the accuracy of the provisioning model, the 
completeness and accuracy of range reviews, 
and the reflection of these reviews within the 
provisions, the Committee concluded that it is 
satisfied with the accounting treatment of the 
valuation of inventory.

EXTERNAL AUDITORS
EFFECTIVENESS OF EXTERNAL AUDIT
The effectiveness of the external audit is 
considered throughout the year through, amongst 
other factors, assessment of the degree of 
the audit firm’s challenge of key estimates and 
judgements made by the business, feedback from 
any external or internal quality reviews on the audit 
and the wider quality of communication with the 
Committee.

In addition at its meeting in February 2015, the 
Committee performed a specific evaluation of the 
performance of the external Auditor considering 
the areas set out above and feedback from 
management. Following this, the Committee 
concluded that:

•	

•	

the overall audit approach, materiality, 
threshold, and areas of audit focus were 
appropriate to the business; and

the audit team possessed the necessary 
quality, expertise and experience to provide an 
independent and objective audit.

54

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015In addition, the external Auditor follows its own 
ethical guidelines and continually reviews its 
audit team to ensure that its independence is not 
compromised.

An analysis of the fees earned by the external 
Auditor is disclosed in note 2 to the financial 
statements.

ROLE AND EFFECTIVENESS OF 
INTERNAL AUDIT 
The Company has a dedicated in-house internal 
audit team, assisted by external specialists if 
necessary. The team principally reviews the 
effectiveness of the controls operating within the 
business by undertaking an agreed schedule 
of independent audits each year. The Audit 
Committee determines the nature and scope of 
the annual audit programme at the beginning 
of each year and revises it from time to time 
according to changing business circumstances 
and requirements. The Audit Committee also 
confirms that internal audit has appropriate 
resources available to it. The annual audit 
programme is derived from an audit universe 
including financial and commercial processes, 
governance issues, and key corporate risks.

Internal Audit reports on a day-to-day basis 
to Andrew Findlay, the Chief Financial Officer, 
but is independent in action and reporting of 
issues, with direct line of communication to 
the Audit Committee Chairman. The findings 
of the independent audits are reported initially 
to executive management and any necessary 
corrective actions are agreed. Summaries of these 
reports are presented to, and discussed with, the 
Audit Committee along with details of progress 
against action plans as appropriate.

WHISTLEBLOWING 
A Whistleblowing Policy and procedure enables 
colleagues to report concerns on matters affecting 
the Group or their employment, without fear of 
recrimination. Posters publicising whistleblowing 
channels are distributed to all stores, autocentres, 
distribution centres and support centres.

The Whistleblowing Policy and procedure was 
reviewed and approved by the Audit Committee 
and was subject to an internal audit review during 
the year. The Company Secretary provides the 
Audit Committee with a regular summary of 
whistleblowing contacts and resolutions.

ANTI-BRIBERY AND CORRUPTION 
POLICY 
The Group’s Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy 
statement reinforces that the Halfords Board is 
committed to conducting its business affairs so 
as to ensure that it does not engage in or facilitate 
any form of corruption. It is Halfords’ policy to 
prohibit all forms of corruption amongst our 
employees, suppliers and any associated parties 
acting on our behalf. The Group has a detailed 
Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy and maintains 
Gifts and Hospitality Registers. Anti-bribery 
expectations are set out in standard purchasing 
terms and conditions. Face-to-face and online 
training has been provided to colleagues to raise 
the awareness of anti-bribery and corruption 
legislation. 

The Audit Committee has requested that anti-
bribery and corruption safeguards are periodically 
reviewed by internal audit.

INTERNAL CONTROL AND RISK 
MANAGEMENT 
Details of the Group’s internal control and risk 
management framework are set out on page 49.

APPROACH TO APPOINTMENT OR 
REAPPOINTMENT
KPMG LLP (formerly KPMG Audit plc) were 
appointed as external Auditor to the Group in 
2009 following a formal tender process. Since that 
time, KPMG LLP has complied with the partner 
rotation requirement set out in Ethical Standards 
for Auditors. A partner rotation was due during the 
year, and accordingly KPMG’s Peter Meehan has 
taken up the responsibilities of Senior Statutory 
Auditor.

The Audit Committee considers that the 
relationship with the Auditor is working well and 
is satisfied with their independence, objectivity 
and effectiveness and has not considered it 
necessary to require KPMG LLP to re-tender for 
external audit work. The Audit Committee has 
recommended to the Board, for approval by 
shareholders at the AGM on 30 July 2015, the 
reappointment of KPMG LLP as external Auditor.

APPROACH TO SAFEGUARDING 
OBJECTIVITY AND INDEPENDENCE IF NON-
AUDIT SERVICES ARE PROVIDED 
The Audit Committee has established a policy to 
ensure that any non-audit services delivered by 
the external Auditor will not jeopardise objectivity 
and independence. The policy is consistent with 
Ethical Standards for Auditors.

The policy specifies:

‘The external Auditor can be used to provide 
non-audit services subject to any non-audit 
engagement proposal provided by the external 
Auditor is formally approved by the Audit 
Committee before contractual arrangements are 
entered into, except for:

i.  Half year review; and 

ii. 

Internal support services supplied by the 
Auditor in order to execute management’s 
Internal Audit plan.

Other than for the above, for each separate 
service proposed to be provided by the Auditor, 
the Chief Financial Officer will prepare a note 
either to be tabled and minuted at an Audit 
Committee meeting or to be circulated via email 
to the Audit Committee members and the CEO 
giving a description of the work to be undertaken, 
the reasons why the Auditor is involved in the 
proposal and how objectivity and independence 
has, and is seen to be, safeguarded.

Consent is required from the Audit Committee 
Chairman on behalf of the Audit Committee 
before the Auditor can be engaged for non-audit 
services.

55

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
REPORT

“ Our approach to 
remuneration supports 
a strong focus on 
performance and reflects 
the nature of our business.” 

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE  
CHAIRMAN’S LETTER

104,000
We Fits 
IN ONE WEEK

KEY FACT

8.9m
00%
LITRES OF 
SCREENWASH
FY15

Remuneration Policy is available on the corporate 
governance section of the Halfords website www.
halfordscompany.com and, for ease of reference, 
is also summarised on pages 58 to 61.  

REMUNERATION STRUCTURE AND 
PHILOSOPHY

The Remuneration structure is comprised of the 
following elements:  

•	 Fixed pay — base salary, benefits and 

pension; and 

•	 Variable pay — annual cash bonus and 

Performance Share Plan.

Our approach to remuneration supports a strong 
focus on performance and reflects the nature 
of our business. Our remuneration philosophy 
is aimed at providing Executive Directors with 
incentive opportunities strongly aligned to growth, 
profitability and shareholder returns.

DEAR SHAREHOLDERS 
On behalf of the Remuneration 
Committee, I am pleased to 
present the Remuneration Report 
for the financial period ended 
3 April 2015.

The Report has been prepared in line with the new 
UK Reporting Regulations that came into force in 
2013 and consists of three sections:

•	 This Annual Statement;

•	 Our Policy Report, which sets out the 

Directors’ Remuneration Policy for all Directors 
of Halfords; and

•	 Our Annual Report on Remuneration, which 
sets out the details of how the Company’s 
Directors were paid during FY15 and how 
our policy will be implemented in FY16. The 
Annual Report on Remuneration is subject 
to an advisory shareholder vote at the 2015 
AGM.

REMUNERATION POLICY
The Committee was pleased that shareholders 
approved our Remuneration Policy at the AGM 
that took place on 29 July 2014. There are no 
proposals to amend the policy at this time and it 
is intended to continue until 2017. The Group’s full 

56

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015following Matt Davies’ resignation and, ultimately, 
approved the package offered to his successor, 
Jill McDonald.

The Committee also approved the addition 
of malus and clawback provisions within the 
FY16 Executive Bonus and Deferred Bonus 
schemes and, as mentioned above, approved the 
introduction of clawback provisions into the new 
PSP rules, alongside existing malus provisions. In 
each case, these provisions give the Committee 
the ability to reduce awards prior to vesting or 
require repayment of awards that have vested or 
been paid in certain circumstances.

CONCLUDING REMARKS
At the forthcoming AGM, shareholders will be 
provided with two separate votes relating to 
remuneration matters:

1.  Vote on the 2015 Annual Report on 

Remuneration in line with the Regulations; this 
is an advisory vote; and 

2.  Approval of the new rules of the Halfords’ 

PSP following the expiry of the current PSP 
Scheme.

I hope that you will find the report clear, 
transparent and informative. The Committee has 
sought to set a remuneration environment that 
strongly aligns the commercial direction of the 
Group with the interests of shareholders, whilst 
reflecting best practice developments and market 
trends. I look forward to your support at the 
Company’s AGM.  

Yours faithfully

Claudia Arney
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
4 June 2015

PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN (“PSP”)
To ensure that the interests of the Executive 
Directors continue to align with the delivery of the 
strategy, the Committee again determined that the 
performance measure for the FY15 PSP would be 
based on 75% Group EBITDA growth and 25% 
Group Revenue Growth.

The rules for the current PSP expire this year, 
having been in place for 10 years. The Committee 
has considered and approved new rules for the 
PSP, which will be placed before members for 
their approval at the 2015 AGM. We took this 
opportunity to introduce clawback provisions into 
the plan, alongside existing malus provisions.   

SAVE AS YOU EARN SCHEME (“SAYE”)
The Committee believes that encouraging 
colleagues to own shares in the business 
encourages them to ‘think like an owner’ in their 
dealings with customers and colleagues, which 
is why the Committee doubled the monthly sum 
that colleagues are permitted to save from £250 
to £500.  Share ownership is another factor that 
makes Halfords a great place to work, as it drives 
colleague motivation and commitment. At the 
last AGM, members approved the renewal of a 
UK SAYE Scheme, which led to the adoption 
of new rules for the UK SAYE. Members also 
approved measures to allow overseas colleagues 
to participate in similar SAYE schemes.   

INCENTIVE / REMUNERATION REVIEW
The Committee approved a 2% salary increase 
for Executive Directors, mirroring that awarded 
to colleagues throughout the Support Centre 
in the October 2014 pay review. Executive 
Directors earned bonuses of 94.0% of their 
maximum FY15 opportunity (FY14 97.5%). The 
Committee determined that this level of bonus 
was appropriate, reflecting the strong PBT result 
and compelling performance against key strategic 
objectives during the financial year.  

Matt Davies resigned as Chief Executive Officer 
with effect from 30 April 2015. His termination 
arrangements were consistent with the approved 
Remuneration Policy. Further details are provided 
at appropriate places throughout the Annual 
Remuneration Report.

The Committee recommended to the Board 
a potential CEO remuneration package, as 
the Group searched for a replacement CEO 

57

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

REMUNERATION POLICY
SUMMARY

2.5m
WIPER BLADES
FY15

KEY FACT5.3m
00%
BULBS
FY15

This section of the report sets 
out Halfords’ remuneration policy 
for all of the Executive Directors 
and Non-Executive Directors, 
explaining the purpose and 
principles underlying the structure 
of remuneration packages and 
how the Policy links remuneration 
to the achievement of sustained 
high performance and long-term 
value creation.  

As our Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the 
“Policy”) is unchanged from that approved by 
shareholders at the 2014 Annual General Meeting, 
we have provided a summary of the Policy to give 
context to decisions taken by the Remuneration 
Committee (the “Committee”) during the year. The 
full Policy was in last year’s Report and Accounts 
and can be found on our website  
www.halfordscompany.com 

A summary of the Policy is provided in the 
following tables.

KEY ELEMENTS OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY

Base salary
Base salary is set at an appropriate level to attract and retain management of a high calibre with 
the necessary financial, retail, customer service and digital skill sets required to deliver a sustainable 
business model and drive shareholder returns.

Key policy features
Base salaries are reviewed annually, typically 
with effect from 1 October, with increases 
broadly aligned to those in the wider workforce.  
Occasionally, larger increases may be considered 
to take account of changes in an individual’s 
role or responsibilities, individual progression or 
experience or external market trends. 

Implementation of the Policy in the period
With effect from 1 October 2014, the salaries 
of the CEO and CFO were increased by 2%, 
mirroring the increase generally awarded to 
colleagues in the Support Centre.  

Changes made
None

Benefits
To provide Executive Directors with market competitive benefits consistent with the role.

Key policy features
Executive Directors receive various benefits as 
part of their package, such as a fully expensed 
car (or a cash allowance and a fuel card), private 
health insurance and life assurance. Where 
an Executive Director relocates to take up a 
role, other benefits may be proposed, such as 
relocation expenses, a housing allowance and 
school fees. 

Implementation of the Policy in the period
Executive Directors continued to enjoy the same 
benefits package as they had in the prior year. No 
allowances or benefits were increased.   

Changes made
None

58

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015Pensions
To provide Executive Directors with an appropriate allowance for retirement planning.

Key policy features
Defined employer contribution funding to the Halfords Pension Plan or 
payments into a personal fund or a cash allowance for Executive Directors 
to make their own pension arrangements. The maximum payable by the 
Company will be 20% of base salary.  

Implementation of the Policy in the period
The CEO received 20% of base salary, whilst the CFO received 15% of  
base salary.

Changes made
None

Annual Bonus
To incentivise Executive Directors to achieve annual financial targets and performance against strategic goals.  

Key policy features
The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 150% of base salary.  

The annual bonus is based on a mix of financial and strategic measures.  
Measures are selected each year by the Committee to ensure continued 
focus on the Company’s strategy. At least 50% of the bonus will be based 
on financial measures.

Generally the annual bonus is paid in cash, but the Committee might 
determine that it be paid in shares or in a mixture of cash and shares.

The Committee may require a portion of any bonus earned to be deferred.  
Deferred bonus awards are normally made in the form of nil cost options, 
which normally vest three years from award. The Committee may decide to 
pay dividends on those shares during the vesting period, either as cash or 
as additional shares.    

Malus provisions apply to any deferred shares, allowing the Committee 
to scale back any award before exercise in circumstances that the 
Committee determines is appropriate such as a material misstatement of the 
Company’s results, serious reputational damage to the Company, or where 
the Company suffers serious losses.  

Implementation of the Policy in the period
In the period, the CEO’s maximum bonus opportunity was 150% of base 
salary, 1/3rd of which will be paid in shares and deferred for three years (with 
dividends reinvested), and the remainder paid in cash. The CFO’s maximum 
bonus opportunity was 100% of base salary, paid in cash.

Changes made
During the period the Committee considered changing market practices 
and, accordingly, the FY16 Executive Bonus and Deferred Bonus Plan will 
reinforce existing malus provisions in relation to any deferred element and 
introduce clawback provisions for any paid element, giving the Company 
the power to seek redress from any individual for material misstatement, 
employee misconduct, serious reputational damage or miscalculation of 
metrics leading to an award under either scheme.

59

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

REMUNERATION POLICY
SUMMARY continued

PSP
To attract and retain Executive Directors of a high calibre.

To incentivise and reward long-term performance and align Executive Directors’ interests with those of our shareholders.  

Key policy features
The PSP comprises annual awards, usually in the form of nil-cost options, 
with vesting based on performance against pre-determined conditions over 
a minimum three-year period.  

The maximum core award is 150% of base salary. A participant has the 
opportunity to earn up to 1.5 × core award for exceptional performance and, 
therefore, the maximum annual face value of awards is 225% of base salary.

Implementation of the Policy in the period
Awards granted in 2015 will vest subject to the achievement of stretching 
Revenue and EBITDA targets. 

The vesting of 25% of the awards will be determined by the growth in the 
Group’s Revenue and the vesting of 75% of the award will be determined by 
the growth in the Group’s EBITDA over a three-year performance period.

In addition to achieving these targets, the vesting of awards will be subject to 
meeting a net debt underpin.  

The core award for the CEO and CFO in the period was 150% of base salary.  

Changes made
The PSP rules expire in 2015, having been in place for 10 years.  The new 
PSP rules that shareholders are being asked to approve at the AGM will 
restate existing malus provisions and introduce clawback provisions, each 
giving the Company the power to seek redress from any individual for 
material misstatement, employee misconduct, serious reputational damage 
or miscalculation of metrics leading to an award under the PSP.  

CEO Co-Investment Award
This one-off award was implemented to recruit and retain Matt Davies as CEO, aligning his interests with those of our shareholders and to reward growth in 
the share price.

Key policy features
A one-off award made on the appointment of the CEO. The CEO was 
required to invest £500,000 in Halfords shares to receive a matching share 
award. 

The CEO was granted an award of matching shares in the form of a nil cost 
option that may vest in tranches following the Committee’s assessment of 
performance.  

The maximum number of matching shares which may be acquired under 
the award (excluding dividend equivalents) is 3.5 times the number of 
investment shares acquired (574,196 shares).

Implementation of the Policy in the period
As Matt Davies, CEO, tendered his resignation in the period, all matching 
share awards were forfeited upon his leaving in April.    

As previously committed, the scheme was not utilised in the recruitment of Jill 
McDonald, successor CEO.  

Changes made
None

60

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015KEY ELEMENTS OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR REMUNERATION POLICY
NED Fees
Fee levels are designed to attract and retain high-calibre individuals to serve as Non-Executive Directors.

Key policy features
Fee levels are set to reflect the time, commitment and experience of the 
Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors, benchmarking fees against UK 
listed retail comparators.  

The fees of Non-Executive Directors are normally reviewed every two years 
by the Board, following a recommendation from the CEO. The Chairman’s 
fees are determined by the Remuneration Committee, again following a 
recommendation from the CEO.

The Chairman’s fee includes a sum for chairing the Nomination Committee 
but other Committee Chairmen may receive an additional fee for that role, as 
does the Senior Independent Director.

The fees are normally paid in cash quarterly but may be paid in shares if this 
is considered appropriate.

Implementation of the Policy in the period
Fees for Non-Executive Directors remained static in the period, the annual fee 
being £48,000, with an additional annual allowance of £5,000 for chairing the 
Audit or Remuneration Committee. The role of Senior Independent Director 
attracts a further annual allowance of £15,000.      

The Chairman’s annual fee remained unchanged at £176,000.  

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors do not currently receive other 
benefits but reasonable benefits may be provided in the future if appropriate.  

Reasonable travel and subsistence expenses were reimbursed.  

Changes made
None

61

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

ANNUAL REMUNERATION
REPORT

“ Our remuneration 
philosophy is aimed 
at providing Executive 
Directors with incentive 
opportunities strongly 
aligned to growth, 
profitability and shareholder 
returns.”  

500,000
MOTs
AUTOCENTRES

00%
170,000

KEY FACT

SERVICES
AUTOCENTRES

THE COMMITTEE
During the period, the 
Remuneration Committee (the 
“Committee”) consisted of Claudia 
Arney (Chairman), Dennis Millard, 
David Adams, Helen Jones, Bill 
Ronald and Keith Harris (Bill and 
Keith retired on 31 May 2014). 

All members are considered to be independent 
for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code. The Company Secretary acts as secretary 
to the Committee. 

The Board has delegated responsibility to the 
Committee for ensuring that a policy exists for the 
remuneration of the CEO, the Chairman, other 
Executive Directors and members of executive 
management. The Committee has designed a 
policy that provides Executive Directors with the 
appropriate incentives to enhance the Group’s 
performance and to reward them for their personal 
contribution to the business. The Committee’s 
other activities include: 

The Committee met on eight occasions during the 
period; attendance details are shown in the table 
on page 45. Details of advisors to the Committee 
can be found on page 63.

SUMMARY OF COMMITTEE ACTIVITY 
DURING FY15
In this period, the Committee has:

•	 Discussed and approved both financial and 
strategic annual bonus metrics and targets;

•	 Discussed and reviewed Directors’ salaries;

•	 Reviewed Directors’ share ownership 

guidelines;

•	 Set parameters for the potential package 

available during the CEO recruitment exercise;

•	 Discussed and reviewed attainment 

against the performance conditions for the 
Performance Share Plan and Company Share 
Option Scheme due to vest during the period;

•	 Approved grants under the Performance Share 
Plan, Company Share Option Scheme (to 
senior managers below Board) and Sharesave 
Scheme;

•	 Recommending to the Board the total 

•	 Considered and approved the design of the 

individual remuneration package of Executive 
Directors and members of executive 
management;

•	 Recommending the design of Company 

share incentive plans to the Board, approving 
any awards to Executive Directors and other 
executive managers under those plans and 
defining any perfomance conditions attached 
to those awards; 

•	 Determining the Chairman’s fee, following a 

recommendation from the CEO; and

proposed Irish Sharesave Scheme;

•	 Reviewed and approved the termination 

arrangements in relation to the outgoing CEO;

•	 Considered and approved the Service 

Agreement and letter of appointment for the 
new CEO;

•	 Considered and approved the drafting of 

Malus and Clawback provision for inclusion in 
the Executive Bonus Scheme and the Deferred 
Bonus Plan; and

•	 Reviewed its choice of appointed remuneration 

•	 Maintaining an active dialogue with institutional 
investors and shareholder representatives. 

advisors.

The Committee’s full Terms of Reference are 
set out on the Company’s website at www.
halfordscompany.com 

62

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015and other stakeholders and welcome shareholder 
feedback on any issue related to Executive 
remuneration. In the event of a substantial vote 
against a resolution in relation to Directors’ 
remuneration, we would seek to understand the 
reasons for any such vote, determine appropriate 
actions and detail any such actions in response 
to it in the Directors’ Remuneration Report. In 
the period, the Committee Chairman and the 
Company Secretary met with one of the largest 
shareholder advisory consultancies to discuss 
executive remuneration. 

STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF THE 
REMUNERATION REPORT
This Remuneration Report has been prepared in 
accordance with the provisions of the Companies 
Act 2006 and Schedule 8 of the Large and 
Medium-sized Companies and Group (Accounts 
and Reports)(Amendment) Regulations 2013. This 
report meets the requirements of the Listing Rules 
and the Disclosure and Transparency Rules. 

The information set out below represents 
auditable disclosures referred to in the Auditors 
Report on pages 74 and 75, as specified by the 
UK Listing Authority and the Regulations.

ADVISORS 
During the year, the Committee has been 
supported by Jonathan Crookall, People Director 
and Justin Richards, Company Secretary. 
The CEO and CFO also attend Committee 
meetings on occasion, at the request of the 
Committee; they are never present when their 
own remuneration is discussed. The Committee 
also engaged with Deloitte LLP, which advised on 
performance measures for the PSP, remuneration 
reporting and other remuneration matters. Fees 
paid to Deloitte for this advice were £19,250. 
Deloitte has also provided advice to management, 
to enable their support of the Committee, primarily 
in relation to remuneration reporting. 

Deloitte is a founding member of the 
Remuneration Consultants Group and adheres 
to the Remuneration Consultants Group Code 
of Conduct when dealing with the Committee. 
We consider Deloitte’s advice to be independent 
and impartial. We are also satisfied that the 
Deloitte Engagement Partner and team, who 
provided remuneration advice to the Committee, 
do not have connections with the Company 
that might impair their independence. The 
Committee considered the potential for conflicts 
of interest and judged that there were appropriate 
safeguards against such conflicts.

Towers Watson also provided the Committee 
with executive salary benchmark data. Towers 
Watson are also signatories of the Remuneration 
Consultants Code of Conduct. Fees paid to 
Towers Watson for this advice were £3,500.

SHAREHOLDER DIALOGUE
The voting outcome from the 2014 Annual 
General Meeting reflected very strong individual 
and institutional shareholder support. We continue 
to be mindful of the concerns of our shareholders 

The following table sets out the votes cast at the 2014 AGM in respect of the previous Remuneration Report.

VOTES IN RELATION TO THE ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

FY14 Directors’ Remuneration Policy (2014 AGM)*
FY14 Directors’ Remuneration Report (2014 AGM)**

* 759,006 votes were withheld in relation to this resolution.
** 16,227 votes were withheld in relation to this resolution.

HOW WAS THE REMUNERATION POLICY IMPLEMENTED IN 2014/15 – EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
SINGLE REMUNERATION FIGURE (AUDITED)

% of votes 
For
 96.45%
99.30%

% of votes 
Against
 2.99%
0.69%

2014/2015
Matt Davies 
Andrew Findlay
Totals
2013/14
Matt Davies
Andrew Findlay
Totals

Base Salary

Bonus 

Benefits

Pension

PSP 

512,575
328,250
840,825

503,750
302,750
806,500

—1
—1
—

736,734
295,181
1,031,915

31,102
15,609
46,711

31,212
17,050
48,262

101,500
49,230
150,730

100,375
45,000
142,250

n/a3
143,4383
143,4383

n/a 2
—2
0

Total ‘Single 
Figure’ 

645,177  
536,527
1,181,704

1,372,071
660,011
2,028,957

1.  Matt Davies and Andrew Findlay tendered their resignations prior to the payment of the FY15 bonus and, accordingly, were not eligible to receive any bonus in respect of the period.

2.  Shares were awarded in August 2011 under the Performance Share Plan based on performance in the period April 2011 to March 2014. In May 2014 the performance conditions for these 

shares were measured and the Committee determined that no awards would vest. Matt Davies did not receive a PSP award in 2011 as this was prior to his joining the Company. 

3.  Shares were awarded in August 2012 under the Performance Share Plan based on performance in the period April 2012 to March 2015. In May 2015 the performance conditions for these 

shares were measured and the Committee determined that a percentage of awards would vest. Matt Davies did not receive a PSP award in 2012 as this was prior to his joining the Company. 
Further detail is given on page 65.

63

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

ANNUAL REMUNERATION
REPORT continued

SALARY
In keeping with its usual cycle of reviewing company-wide salaries in October, the Committee considered an executive pay report compiled for it by Towers 
Watson. We concluded that the CEO and CFO’s salaries were competitive and accordingly decided to increases both by 2%, mirroring the increase generally 
awarded to colleagues in the Support Centre. 

2014/15 ANNUAL BONUS 
Annual Bonuses for FY15 for Executive Directors were based 80% on Group PBT and 20% on the delivery of key strategic initiatives crucial to the delivery of 
the Company’s strategy. 

Annual Bonuses reported in the table on page 63 and payable in June 2015 for the FY15 financial period were calculated as follows:

Bonus 
Opportunity 
(% of total 
award)

Performance

Measure

PBT

Stretch
80% 97% of budget 100% of budget 106% of budget

Threshold

Target

KEY STRATEGIC INITIATIVES 
Net promoter score 

Engagement index

Value added sales

Retention of store 
colleagues
50:39 store delivery

Total Bonus

As measured by the talkback mechanism in stores – increasing the 
average score over the final three months of the year. 
Increasing the year on year engagement index based on the annual 
survey. 
Increasing the total incremental sales in the financial year of 3Bs 
fitting, other auto fitting, cycle repair, Sat Nav attachment and cycle 
accessories.
Reducing the number of colleagues who leave the business, as a 
percentage, within three months of their start date. 
Successful roll out of programme to defined standard.

Performance delivered
PBT for the year was in excess of 
106% of budget and therefore this 
proportion of the annual bonus is 
payable in full.

Achieved

Not achieved

Partially achieved

Achieved

Achieved

Bonus 
awarded 
(% of total 
award)
80%

4%

0%

3%

4%

4%

95%

The annual bonus outturn was reviewed in the context of the performance of the underlying business during the year and delivery against strategy. In that 
context, we assessed the level of bonus to be appropriate however, due to the resignations of Matt Davies and Andrew Findlay prior to the payment of bonus, 
each ceased to be eligible and, therefore, did not receive a bonus in respect of the period.  

We are committed to providing the greatest possible transparency in relation to retrospective achievement against the objectives that form part of the bonus 
measures. Clearly, some of those measures are commercially sensitive and to disclose them could reveal information about our business planning and 
budgeting to competitors, which could be damaging to our business interests and, therefore, also to shareholders. Of the FY15 metrics against which bonus 
outturn has been assessed, we are able to disclose the following:

Threshold
81%
11%

Maximum
82%
10%

FY15 
performance
79%
9%

FY15 performance against 
FY14 outturn
+5%pts
+8.2%

Measure
Engagement index
Retention of store colleagues

Measure1
Net promoter score
Value added sales

1 50:39 Store delivery was a new metric for FY15. 

64

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015 
2012 PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN AWARD
Awards granted in 2012 under the PSP were subject to the following performance conditions:

Award “Multiplier” 
(up to 1.5 x initial award) i.e. 225% 
of salary.

1.5 x initial award vesting

TSR Performance Element (50% of 
award)
Upper Decile performance

EPS Performance Element (50% of 
award)
16% growth p.a. above RPI

Core Award
(150% of salary)

Straight-line vesting

100% Vesting

Straight-line vesting
30% Vesting 
0% Vesting

Between Upper Quartile and 
Upper Decile performance 
Upper Quartile performance

Between 11% growth p.a. 
and 16% growth p.a. above RPI
11% growth p.a. above RPI

Between Median and Upper 
Quartile performance
Median performance
Below Median performance

Between 4% growth p.a. and 
11% growth p.a. above RPI
4% growth p.a. above RPI
Below 4% growth p.a. above RPI

TSR and EPS performance are assessed on 
an independent basis. However, to ensure 
that the PSP continues to support sustainable 
performance, the multiplier for one measure is only 
applied if performance is at least at the threshold 
level (30% vesting) for the other measure. 

The companies included in the TSR comparator 
group are based on the FTSE 350 general retail 
and food retail companies on the date of grant. 
For awards granted in 2012 these are as follows: 

N. Brown Group plc; Carpetright plc; Debenhams 
plc; Dignity plc; Dixons Retail plc (formerly DSG 
International); Dunelm Group plc; Greggs plc; 
Home Retail Group plc; JD Sports Fashion plc;  
J. Sainsbury plc; Darty plc (formerly Kesa 
Electricals); Kingfisher plc; Marks & Spencer plc; 
Morrison (WM) Supermarkets plc; WH Smith 
plc; Next plc; Sports Direct International plc; and 
Tesco plc. 

Based on TSR performance between 31 March 
2012 to 3 April 2015, Halfords’ TSR was 
positioned at median against the comparator 
group and therefore 30% of the TSR element of 
the award will vest.  EPS growth between FY12 
and FY15 was 5.6% below RPI and, therefore, 0% 
of the EPS element of the award will vest. 

65

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

ANNUAL REMUNERATION
REPORT continued

The following table shows the history of PSP award vesting over the last 5 five years.

PSP vestings (% of maximum)

FY11
99%

FY12
0%

FY13
0%

FY14
0%

FY15
15%

BENEFITS
Benefits include payments made in relation to life assurance, private health insurance and the provision of a fully expensed company car or equivalent cash 
allowance and fuel card.

PENSION
Pension payments represent contributions made either to defined contribution pension schemes or as a cash allowance. The CEO received a contribution of 
20% of base salary and the CFO received a contribution of 15% of base salary.

SHARE AWARDS GRANTED DURING THE YEAR (AUDITED) 
PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN
During the period we approved awards to the Executive Directors under the Performance Share Plan as follows:

Matt Davies

Andrew Findlay

Date of award

Type of award

11 August 2014

Nil cost option 
(0p exercise price)

* These awards were based on 150% of salary

** Based on the mid-market price on the date of the awards of £4.79

Maximum face value 
of award (1.5x the 
number of awards 
granted)**
£1,161,520

Number of shares
161,659*

103,525*

£743,827

Threshold vesting 
(% of target 

award) Performance period

30%

29 March 2014 to 
31 March 2017

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
Awards granted in 2014 are subject to the following performance conditions:

Award “Multiplier” 
(up to 1.5 x initial award) i.e. 225% 
of salary.
Core Award
(150% of salary)

1.5 x initial award vesting

Straight-line vesting
100% Vesting
Straight-line vesting
30% Vesting
0% Vesting

Group Revenue Growth – CAGR 
(25% of the award)
7.5% or more

Between 6.5% and 7.5%
6.5%
Between 5.0% and 6.5%
5.0%
Below 5.0%

Group EBITDA Growth 
(75% of the award
9.0% or more

Between 7.5% and 9.0%
7.5%
Between 5.0% and 7.5%
5.0%
Below 5.0%

In addition to achieving these targets, the vesting of awards will be subject to meeting an underpin of net debt to EBITDA ratio no greater than 1.5x throughout the 
three-year performance period. This will ensure that net debt remains at appropriate levels and management is not incentivised to increase net debt levels to meet 
targets; the focus is to maximise the return on cash investments. The Core Award shares that vest will become exercisable in August 2017. To the extent that awards 
vest in line with the performance multiplier outlined above, these shares will only become exercisable in August 2019, following a retention period of two years.

DEFERRED BONUS PLAN
Matt Davies received a bonus of £736,734 in respect of 2013/14 of which one-third (£245,578) was deferred into 50,437 shares under the Deferred Bonus 
Plan on 30 May 2014 at a price of £4.869.

66

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015OUTSTANDING SHARE AWARDS (AUDITED)
PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN
The following summarises outstanding awards under the PSP:

Matt Davies2

Award Date
7 August 2013
11 August 2014
Andrew Findlay 3 August 20123
7 August 2013
11 August 2014

Mid-
market 
price on 
date of 
awards
3.74
4.79
2.20
3.74
4.79

Awards 
held 
28 March 
2014
202,808

202,892
113,776

Awarded 
during 
the 
period
—
— 161,659
—
—
— 103,525

Dividend
Reinvestment1
6,308
1,938
6,310
3,539
1,241

Forfeited 
during 
the 
period
—
—
—
—
—

Lapsed 
during 
the 
period
—
—
—
—
—

Exercised 
during the 
year

Awards 
Performance 
held 
period 3 years 
3 April 
to
2015
— 209,116
1 April 2016
— 163,596 31 March 2017
3 April 2015
— 209,202
— 117,314
1 April 2016
— 104,766 31 March 2017

1. 

Interim and final dividends have been reinvested in shares at prices between £3.54 and £4.8177.

2.  Matt Davies resigned on 30 April 2015 and his outstanding PSP awards lapsed at this date in accordance with the scheme rules.

3.  The Remuneration Committee has reviewed the performance conditions attached to 2012 Performance Share Plan award and determined that 15% of the award will vest in August 2015.  

Please see page 65 for details.    

The performance conditions for 2012 awards were TSR performance and EPS growth. Awards from 2013 onwards have performance conditions based on 
Group revenue performance and Group EBITDA growth. 

CO-INVESTMENT PLAN
On appointment, the Company made Matt Davies a one-off Co-Investment Award. This award was designed to allow the Company to recruit and retain an 
executive of the calibre required to run the business and to incentivise the CEO to deliver exceptional shareholder value creation through the achievement of 
share price performance targets. This plan was adopted for the sole purpose of making a one-off award to Matt Davies and it was not anticipated that any 
further awards would be made under this plan to either Matt Davies or any other executive. 

Matt Davies

Award Date
28 January 2013

Awards held 
28 March 
2014
594,666

Awarded 
during the 
period
—

Dividend
reinvestment1
19,141

Lapsed during 
the period
—

Exercised 
during the 
year
—

Awards held  
3 April 2015
613,807

Performance 
period 3-5 
years
Nov 2015 
to Nov 2017

1. 

Interim and final dividends have been reinvested in shares at prices between £3.709 and £4.759

Matt Davies tendered his resignation in the period and accordingly, all awards under the Co-Investment Plan lapsed upon his leaving. As previously committed, 
the scheme was not utilised in the recruitment of Jill McDonald, successor CEO. 

DEFERRED BONUS PLAN

Matt Davies

Award Date
31 May 2013
30 May 2014

Awards held 
28 March 
2014
19,678
—

Awarded 
during the 
period
—
50,4372

Dividend
Reinvestment
630
1,587

Lapsed during 
the period
—
—

Exercised 
during the 
year
—
—

Awards held  
3 April 20151
20,308
52,024

1.  Matt Davies resigned on 30 April 2015. In accordance with the Plan rules, he is entitled to exercise awards held in this Plan

2.  Matt Davies received a bonus of £736,734 of which one-third was deferred into shares under the Halfords Deferred Bonus Plan at a price of £4.869 per share

CEO PAY COMPARED TO PERFORMANCE
The following graph shows the TSR performance of the Company since April 2009, against the FTSE 350 General Retailers (which was chosen because it 
represents a broad equity market index of which the Company is a constituent).     

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

Halfords Group

FTSE 350 General Retailers

Source: Thompson Datastream

67

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

ANNUAL REMUNERATION
REPORT continued

The following table summarises the CEO single figure for the past five years and outlines the proportion of annual bonus paid as a percentage of the maximum 
opportunity and the proportion of PSP awards vesting as a percentage of the maximum opportunity. The annual bonus is shown based on the year to which 
performance related and the PSP is shown for the last year of the performance period.

CEO single figure 
(£000)

Annual bonus (% of 
maximum)

PSP vesting (% of 
maximum)

Matt Davies1
David Wild2
Matt Davies
David Wild
Matt Davies
David Wild

2010/11

2011/12

606

0%

99%

617

0%

0%

2012/13
311
198
50%

n/a
n/a

2013/14
635
—
97.5%

n/a
—

2014/15
645
—
n/a3
—
n/a
—

1.  Matt Davies was appointed on 4 October 2012 and stepped down as CEO on 30 April 2015. Matt did not receive PSP awards in 2011 or 2012, as these were before he was appointed. 
2.  David Wild stepped down as CEO on 19 July 2012. David’s 2010 PSP award lapsed on leaving.
3.  Matt Davies tendered his resignation prior to the payment of the FY15 bonus and, accordingly was not eligible to receive any bonus in respect of the period. 

SHAREHOLDING GUIDELINES (AUDITED)
The Committee believes that it is important that Executive Directors’ interests are aligned with those of our shareholders to incentivise them to deliver the 
corporate strategy, thus creating value for all shareholders. Executive Directors are encouraged to acquire and retain shares with a value equal to 100% of their 
annual base salary. Executive Directors have a five-year period to build this shareholding following their appointment.

Shareholding requirement
Current shareholding
Current value (based on share price on 3 April 2015)
Current % of salary
Date by which guideline should be met

Matt Davies Andrew Findlay
100%
19,108
£87,343
26%
1 February 2016

100%
174,056
£795,610
154%
4 October 2017

These figures include those of their spouse or civil partner and infant children, or stepchildren, as required by Section 822 of the Companies Act 2006. There 
was no change in these beneficial interests between 3 April 2015 and 4 June 2015.

OUTSIDE APPOINTMENTS
Halfords recognises that its Executive Directors may be invited to become non-executive directors of other companies. Such non-executive duties can 
broaden experience and knowledge which can benefit Halfords. Subject to approval by the Board, Executive Directors are allowed to accept non-executive 
appointments and retain the fees received, provided that these appointments are not likely to lead to conflicts of interest. Matt Davies received fees of 
£38,993.18 as a non-executive director of Dunlem Group plc in the period, having resigned from the post on 8 January 2015.

LOSS OF OFFICE PAYMENTS (AUDITED)
No loss of office payment was made to a Director during the year. 

PAYMENTS TO FORMER DIRECTORS (AUDITED)
As stated in the prior year, Paul McClenaghan left the business on 12 April 2013 with ‘Good Leaver’ status and, therefore, retained a pro-rated portion of his 
Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) award that had been granted in 2012. The Remuneration Committee has reviewed the performance conditions attached to 
the 2012 PSP and determined that 15% of the awards will vest, which translates to a pro-rated vesting of 11,320 shares for Paul.  

HOW WAS THE REMUNERATION POLICY IMPLEMENTED IN 2014/2015 – NON EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR SINGLE FIGURE COMPARISON (AUDITED)

Director
Dennis Millard
David Adams

Claudia Arney
Helen Jones

Keith Harris
Bill Ronald
Totals

Role
Chairman
Senior Independent Director & Audit Committee 
Chairman
Remuneration Committee Chairman
NED

NED (until 31 May 2014)
NED (until 31 May 2014)

Board 
Fees
174,000

48,000
48,000
48,000

8,000
8,000
334,000

Senior 
Independent 
Director

Committee 
Chairman 
Fees

Total 
‘Single Figure’ 
2015
 174,000

Total 
‘Single Figure’ 
2014
165,916

 15,000

5,000
 5,000

15,000 

10,000

68,000
53,000
48,000

8,000
8,000
359,000

51,500
45,667
—

49,833
59,000
371,916

68

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR SHAREHOLDING
Director
Dennis Millard
David Adams
Claudia Arney
Helen Jones

2015

50,000
6,544
21,052
3,000

2014
50,000
6,350
21,052
—

These figures include those of their spouses, civil partners and infant children, or stepchildren, as required by Section 822 of the Companies Act 2006. There 
was no change in these beneficial interests between the 3 April 2015 and 4 June 2015.

Non-Executive Directors do not have a shareholding guideline but they are encouraged to buy shares in the Company.

HOW REMUNERATION POLICY WILL BE IMPLEMENTED FOR 2014/15 — EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
SALARY
Base salaries were reviewed with effect from 1 October 2014 and increases were made as per the details on page 69. Current salaries for the Executive 
Directors are as follows:

CEO (prior to leaving on 30 April 2015)
CFO

Salaries will next be reviewed with effect from 1 October 2015.

ANNUAL BONUS
The annual bonus opportunity for 2015/16 will remain unchanged as follows:

CEO

CFO

•	 Maximum opportunity of 150% of base salary

•	 2/3rd paid in cash

•	 1/3rd paid in Halfords shares deferred for three years
•	 Maximum opportunity of 100% of base salary

•	 Paid in cash

£517,650
£331,500

The annual bonus will continue to be based 80% on Profit Before Tax (‘PBT’) performance and 20% based on performance against strategic objectives. 
PBT targets range from 94% of budget, where payment is zero to 106% of budget for maximum payment. The Committee reviews the goals included in the 
strategic objectives portion of the bonus to ensure that they remain appropriate. 

In determining whether any bonuses are payable, the Committee retains the discretionary authority to increase or decrease the bonus to ensure that the level of 
bonus paid is appropriate in the context of performance. Bonus targets are considered by the Board to be commercially sensitive as they could reveal information 
about Halfords’ business plan and budgeting process to competitors which could be damaging to Halfords’ business interests and therefore to shareholders.

SHARE PLANS 
We have adopted four share plans: The Halfords Sharesave Scheme; the Halfords Company Share Option Scheme (“CSOS”), a market value share option 
plan; the Halfords Performance Share Plan (“PSP”); and the Halfords Co-Investment Plan (it is intended that no further awards will be made under this plan).

For the Executive Directors we intend to continue granting awards under the Performance Share Plan of 150% of base salary. If exceptional performance is achieved 
up to 1.5x the core award can be earned (‘performance multiplier’). The vesting of awards will be subject to meeting the following performance conditions:

Award “Multiplier” 
(up to 1.5 x initial award) i.e. 225% 
of salary.
Core Award
(150% of salary)

1.5 x initial award vesting

Straight-line vesting
100% Vesting
Straight-line vesting
30% Vesting
0% Vesting

Group Revenue Growth – CAGR 
(25% of the award)
7.50%

Group EBITDA Growth 
(75% of the award
9.00%

Between 6.50% and 7.50%
6.50%
Between 5.00% and 6.50%
5.00%
Below 5.00%

Between 7.50% and 9.00%
7.50%
Between 5.00% and 7.50%
5.00%
Below 5.00%

In addition to achieving these targets, the vesting of awards will be subject to meeting an underpin of net debt to EBITDA ratio no greater than 1.5x throughout 
the three-year performance period. This will ensure that net debt remains at appropriate levels and management is not incentivised to increase net debt levels 
to meet targets; the focus is to maximise the return on cash investments. The Core Award shares that vest will become exercisable in August 2017. To the 
extent that awards vest in line with the performance multiplier outlined above, these shares will only become exercisable in August 2019, following a retention 
period of two years. We are committed to providing the greatest possible transparency and will, therefore, provide retrospective disclosure of achievement 
against bonus metrics wherever possible, as further described on page 64.  

While committed to the use of equity-based performance-related remuneration as a means of aligning Executive Directors’ interests with those of 
shareholders, we are aware of shareholders’ concerns on dilution through the issue of new shares to satisfy such awards. Therefore, when reviewing 
remuneration arrangements, we take into account the effects such arrangements may have on dilution. Halfords intends to comply with the Investment 
Association guidelines relating to the issue of new shares for equity incentive plans. 

69

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCEOUR GOVERNANCE > REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT

ANNUAL REMUNERATION
REPORT continued

HOW REMUNERATION POLICY WILL BE IMPLEMENTED FOR 2015/16 — NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
FEES
The fees of Non-Executive Directors will normally be reviewed every two years to ensure that they are in line with market benchmarks, so that the Company 
can attract and retain individuals of the highest calibre.  Any changes to these fees will be approved by the Board as a whole following a recommendation from 
the Chief Executive. The base fee for Non-Executive Directors was increased by 6.6% as from 1 March 2014, this was the first increases in these fees since 
April 2009. No fees were changed during the period. Current fees for Non-Executive Directors are as follows:

Chairman
Base fee
Additional fees
Senior Independent Director
Committee Chairman (Audit and Remuneration)

2015

£176,000
£48,000

£15,000
£5,000

2014
£176,000
£48,000

£15,000
£5,000

SPEND ON PAY
The Committee is aware of the importance of pay across the Group in delivering the Group’s strategy and of shareholders’ views on executive remuneration. 

CHANGE IN REMUNERATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE COMPARED TO GROUP EMPLOYEES
The table below sets out the increase in total remuneration of the Chief Executive and that of all colleagues.

% change in base salary FY14 to FY15

% change in bonus earned FY14 to FY15

% change in benefits FY14 to FY15

Chief Executive
All colleagues

2.0
3.0

—1
-26.0

No change
No change

1.  Matt Davies tendered his resignation in the period and, accordingly was not eligible to receive any bonus in respect of the period

2.  The increase generally awarded to all colleagues was 2% with an additional 1% merit pot

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF PAY 
The Committee is also aware of shareholders’ views on remuneration and its relationship to other cash disbursements. The following table shows the 
relationship between the Company’s financial performance, payments made to shareholders, payments made to tax authorities and expenditure on payroll.

EBITDA1
PBT (underlying)1
Returned to Shareholders:
Dividend
Share Buyback
Payments to Employees:
Wages & Salaries
Including Directors2

1.  Based on the 52 week period.

2.  Based on the single figure calculation, not all of which is included within wages and salary costs.

2015

£109.9m
£81.1m

£28.4m
—

£183.7m
£1.18m

2014
£101.1m
£72.8m

£27.7m
—

£173.0m
£2.0m

70

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015•	

the Annual Report and Accounts include a fair 
review of the development and performance of 
the business and the position of the issuer and 
the undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole, together with a description 
of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

We consider the annual report and accounts, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business model and 
strategy.

Approved by order of the Board.

Dennis Millard  
Chairman 
4 June 2015

OUR GOVERNANCE > DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

DIRECTORS’
RESPONSIBILITIES

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ 
RESPONSIBILITIES IN RESPECT OF THE 
ANNUAL REPORT AND THE FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS 
The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and the Group and parent 
Company financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare 
Group and parent Company financial statements 
for each financial year. Under that law they are 
required to prepare the Group financial statements 
in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU 
and applicable law and have elected to prepare 
the parent Company financial statements in 
accordance with UK Accounting Standards. 

Under company law the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they are 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the 
state of affairs of the Group and parent Company 
and of their profit or loss for that period. In 
preparing each of the Group and parent Company 
financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•	 select suitable accounting policies and then 

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are sufficient 
to show and explain the parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the parent Company and enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006. They have general 
responsibility for taking such steps as are 
reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets 
of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and 
other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the 
Directors are also responsible for preparing a 
Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance 
Statement that complies with that law and those 
regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance 
and integrity of the corporate and financial 
information included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation 
and dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

apply them consistently; 

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•	

the financial statements, prepared in 
accordance with the applicable set of 
accounting standards, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position 
and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

•	 make judgements and estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent; 

•	

•	

for the Group financial statements, state 
whether they have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU; 

for the parent Company financial statements, 
state whether applicable UK Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and explained in 
the parent Company financial statements; and 

•	 prepare the financial statements on the going 
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to 
presume that the Group and the parent 
Company will continue in business. 

71

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTOUR GOVERNANCE23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015OUR  
GOVERNANCE
FINANCIAL 
FINANCIALS
STATEMENTS

Auditors Report
Auditors’ Report
Corporate Governance Report

Index to Financials
Index to Financials
Audit Committee Report

Consolidated Income Statement
Consolidated Income Statement
Remuneration Committee Report

Consolidated Statement of 
Consolidated Statement of 
Directors’ Responsibilities
Comprehensive Income
Comprehensive Income
Directors’ Report
Consolidated Statement of 
Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Financial Position
Position
Consolidated Statement of Changes in 
Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Shareholders Equity
Shareholders’ Equity
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

Notes to Consolidated Statement of 
Accounting Policies
Cash Flows
Notes to the Financial Statements
Accounting Policies
Company Balance Sheet
Notes to the Financial Statements
Reconciliation of Movements in 
Company Balance Sheet
Total Shareholders’ Funds

Reconciliation of Movements in Total 
Accounting Policies
Shareholders’ Funds
Notes to the Financial Statements
Accounting Policies

Notes to the Financial Statements

00
74
00

00
76
00

00
77
00

00
78
00

00
79
00

00
80

00
81

00
83

89
00
106
00
107
00

00
108

109
00

00

IMAGE 
PLACEMENT

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT’
TO THE MEMBERS OF HALFORDS GROUP PLC ONLY

OPINIONS AND CONCLUSIONS ARISING FROM OUR AUDIT
1. OUR OPINION ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS IS UNMODIFIED
We have audited the financial statements of Halfords Group plc (“the Group”) for the 53 week period ended 3 April 2015 set out on pages 77 to 111. In our 
opinion:

•	

•	

•	

•	

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 3 April 2015 and of the Group’s profit 
for the 53 week period then ended;

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European 
Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU);

the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK Accounting standards; and

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial 
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

2. OUR ASSESSMENT OF RISKS OF MATERIAL MISSTATEMENT
In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on our audit were as follows.

VALUATION OF INVENTORY WITHIN THE RETAIL DIVISION (£147.8 MILLION)
Refer to pages 52 to 55 (Audit Committee Report), page 86 (accounting policy) and page 97 (financial disclosures).

•	 The risk – The Group holds a significant amount of inventory across a broad and diverse product range. Changes in consumer tastes and demands may 
mean that they cannot be sold or sales prices are discounted to less than the current carrying value. Estimating the future demand for, and hence the 
recoverable amount of, these products is inherently subjective.

•	 Our response – Our audit procedures in this area included testing the design and effectiveness of controls over identifying slow moving or discontinued 
products. We critically assessed the Group’s provision for those product lines identified as slow moving or potentially slow moving, by obtaining an 
understanding of the Group’s sales and purchasing plans for 2015/6, and the new product launches therein, as well as the level of expected discounting. 
We compared post year-end sales data to items within the Group’s provision and to information provided by Category Managers responsible for each 
product category, in particular any product ranges that were forecast to be phased out or replaced, which were corroborated with the Group’s purchasing 
plans. In addition, we compared inventory holding at the year end to past, and expected, sales performance to further identify potentially excess inventory 
lines.

We also considered the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures about the degree of estimation involved in arriving at the provision.

VALUATION OF GOODWILL ASSOCIATED WITH THE NATIONWIDE AUTOCENTRES ACQUISITION (£69.7 MILLION)
Refer to pages 52 to 55 (Audit Committee Report), page 85 (accounting policy) and page 95 (financial disclosures).

•	 The risk – Following the acquisition of Nationwide Autocentres in 2010, the Group has held significant goodwill in the business. The business operates in 
a competitive market and commercial difficulties; such as loss of a significant customer, changes to market share or changes to the frequency with which 
customers replace their cars, may lead to a risk that the business does not meet the growth projections necessary to support the carrying value of the 
goodwill. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in forecasting these cashflows, this is one of the key judgemental areas that our audit is concentrated on.

•	 Our response – Our audit procedures included, challenging the assumptions used around prospective trading levels, in light of the historical forecasting 
accuracy for newly opened Autocentres, given the proportion which have been opened in the past 2-3 years. We assessed the Group’s performance 
against budget in the current and prior periods to evaluate the historical accuracy of overall forecasts. We used breakeven analysis to determine the 
key sensitivities within the budgeting model, which we considered to be the discount rate and the growth rate. The discount rate was determined by an 
independent third party. Further, we have critically assessed the various components of discount rate, by benchmarking the rate against external market 
data and the Group’s financial position. We have assessed the continuing improvement in customer retention, a key factor in the growth rate, through 
reference to the Net Promoter Score (NPS) provided by an independent third party, and through our observation of a recent increase in customer-centric 
initiatives around the Group.

We considered the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures about the sensitivity of the outcome of the impairment assessment to changes in key assumptions.

3. OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY AND AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT
The materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £4.0 million (FY14: £5.0 million), determined with reference to a benchmark of Group 
profit before tax, of which it represents 5.0% (FY14: 6.9%), a reduction from the prior period to ensure consistency with the industry peer group and other 
listed companies.

We report to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £0.2 million in addition to other identified misstatements 
that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

The Group audit team performed the audit of the Group as if it was a single aggregated set of financial information. The audit was performed using the 
materiality set out above and covered 100% of total Group revenue, Group profit before taxation, and total Group assets.

4. OUR OPINION ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006 IS UNMODIFIED
In our opinion:

•	

•	

the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent 
with the financial statements.

74

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > AUDITORS’ REPORT5. WE HAVE NOTHING TO REPORT IN RESPECT OF THE MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION
Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required to report to you if, based on the knowledge we acquired during our audit, we have identified other information 
in the annual report that contains a material inconsistency with either that knowledge or the financial statements, a material misstatement of fact, or that is 
otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to report to you if:

•	 we have identified material inconsistencies between the knowledge we acquired during our audit and the directors’ statement that they consider that the 
annual report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy; or

•	

the Audit Committee report, as set out on pages 52 to 55 does not appropriately address matters communicated by us to the Audit and Risk Committee.

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•	 adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not 

visited by us; or

•	

the parent company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting 
records and returns; or

•	 certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

•	

•	

the directors’ statement, set out on page 41, in relation to going concern;

the part of the Corporate Governance Statement on pages 42 to 49 relating to the company’s compliance with the ten provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 2012 specified for our review.

We have nothing to report in respect of the above responsibilities.

SCOPE OF REPORT AND RESPONSIBILITIES
As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 71, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is provided on the Financial 
Reporting Council’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate. This report is made solely to the company’s members as a body and is subject to 
important explanations and disclaimers regarding our responsibilities, published on our website at www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2014a, which are 
incorporated into this report as if set out in full and should be read to provide an understanding of the purpose of this report, the work we have undertaken and 
the basis of our opinions.

Peter Meehan (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants 
One Snowhill  
Snow Hill Queensway 
Birmingham  
B4 6GH  
4 June 2015

75

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIALS  > INDEX TO FINANCILS

INDEX TO
FINANCIALS

Financial Statements

Consolidated Income Statement

Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income

Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Position

Consolidatedd Statement of 
Changes in Shareholderss’ Equity

Consolidated Statement of  
Cash Flows

Notes to Consolidated Statement of 
Cash flows

Accounting Policies

General Information

Statement of Compliance

Basis of Preparation

Basis of Consolidation

Subsidiary Undertaking

Business Combinations

Revenue Recognition

Retail

Car Servicing 

Promotions and Returns

Financial Income

Non-Recurring items

Earnings Per Share

Foreign Currency Translation

Functional and Presentation 
Currency

Transactions and Balances

Employee Benefits

Pensions

Share-Based Payment 
Transactions

Taxation

Dividends

Intangible Assets

Goodwill

Computer Software

Acquired Intangible Assets

Property, Plant and Equipment

Impairment of Assets

Leases

Financial Leases

Operating Leases

Landlord Surrender Payments

Sublease Income

Inventories

Provisions

Financial Instruments

Financial Assets

Trade Receivables

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Financial Liabilities and Equtiy

Bank Borrowings

Trade Payables

Equity Instruments

Derivative Financials 
Instruments and Hedge 
Accounting

Estimates and Judgements

Allowances Against the Carrying 
Value of Inventories

Intangible Asset Valuations

Impairment of Assets

Adoption of New and Revised 
Standards

New Standards and Interpretations 
Not Yet Adopted

Notes to the Financial Statements

Operating Segments

Operating Expenses

Operating Profit

Staff Costs

Non-Recurring Items

Financial Income and Costs

Taxation

Dividends

Earnings Per Share

Acquisition of Subsidiary

Intangible Assets

Tangible Assets

Inventories

Trade and Other Receivables

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Borrowings

Trade and Other Payables

Provisions

Deferred Tax

Financial Instruments and Related 
Disclosures

Treasury Policy

Market Risk

Interest Rate Risk

Capital Risk Management

Fair Value Disclosures

Fair Value Hierarchy

Credit Risk

Foreign Currency Risk

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

83

84

84

84

84

84

84

84

84

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

86

86

86

86

86

86

86

86

86

86

87

87

87

87

87

87

87

87

87

88

88

88

89

90

90

91

91

92

92

93

93

94

95

96

97

97

97

98

98

98

99

99

99

99

99

100

100

100

100

100

Pension Liability Risk

Liquidity Risk

Capital and Reserves

Share-Based Payments

Halfords Company  
Share Option Scheme

Halfords Sharesave Scheme

Performance Share Plan

Co-Investment Share Plan

Commitments

Pensions

Contingent Liabilities

Related Party Transactions

Subsidary Undertaking

Transactions with Key 
Management Personnel

Off balance Sheet Arrangements

Post balance Sheet Events

Company Balance Sheet

Company Balance Sheet

Reconciliation of Movements In Total 
Shareholders Funds

Reconciliation of Movements in 
Total Shareholders’ Funds

Accounting Policies

Basis of Preparation

Share-Based Payments

Investments

Dividends

Notes to the Financial Statements

Profit and Loss Account

Fees Payable to the Auditors

Staff Costs

Investments

Principal Subsidiary  
Undertakings

Debtors

Creditors

Borrowings

Equity Share Capital

Potential Issue of Ordinary 
Shares

Interest in Own Shares

Reserves

Related Party Disclosures

Contingent Liabilities

Off Balance Sheet Arrangements

Five Year Record

Five Year Record

Key Performance Indicators

Key Performance Indicators

101

101

102

102

102

102

103

103

103

105

105

105

105

105

105

105

106

107

109

109

109

109

109

109

109

109

109

110

110

110

111

111

111

111

111

111

111

112

112

76

Getting Into Gear
Halfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-201552 weeks to 28 March 2014
Non-recurring 
items
(note 5)
£m

Before
Non-recurring 
Items
£m

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

CONSOLIDATED INCOME 
STATEMENT

For the period

Notes

Before
Non-recurring 
Items
£m

53 weeks to 3 April 2015
Non-recurring 
items
(note 5)
£m

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Operating expenses
Results from operating activities
Finance costs
Finance income
Net finance expense

Profit before income tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the financial 
period attributable to equity 
shareholders
Earnings per share
Basic
Diluted

1,025.4
(479.1)
546.3
(458.7)
87.6
(3.6)
0.1
(3.5)

84.1
(17.9)

66.2

34.1p
33.5p

2
3
6
6

7

9
9

Total
£m

1,025.4
(479.1)
546.3
(459.0)
87.3
(3.6)
0.1
(3.5)

83.8
(18.0)

—
—
—
(0.3)
(0.3)
—
—
—

(0.3)
(0.1)

(0.4)

65.8

33.8p
33.3p

939.7
(435.5)
504.2
(426.4)
77.8
(5.2)
0.2
(5.0)

72.8
(17.0)

55.8

28.8p
28.4p

All results relate to continuing operations of the Group.

The notes on pages 89 to 111 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

Total
£m

939.7
(435.5)
504.2
(426.6)
77.6
(5.2)
0.2
(5.0)

72.6
(17.1)

—
—
—
(0.2)
(0.2)
—
—
—

(0.2)
(0.1)

(0.3)

55.5

28.6p
28.2p

77

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Profit for the period
Other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges:
  Fair value changes in the period
  Transfers to inventory
Transfers to net profit:
  Cost of sales
Income tax on other comprehensive income
Other comprehensive income for the period, net of income tax
Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to equity shareholders

53 weeks to
3 April 
2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

65.8

55.5

Notes

7.9
(1.4)

(3.4)
(1.2)
1.9
67.7

(3.0)
1.1

(0.1)
0.8 
(1.2)
54.3

7

All items within the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income are classified as items that are or may be recycled to the income statement.

The notes on pages 89 to 111 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

78

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF 
FINANCIAL POSITION

Notes

3 April
2015
£m

28 March 
2014
£m

Assets
Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax asset
Total non-current assets
Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Derivative financial instruments
Cash and cash equivalents
Total current assets
Total assets
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Borrowings
Derivative financial instruments
Trade and other payables
Current tax liabilities
Provisions 
Total current liabilities
Net current assets
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings
Accruals and deferred income – lease incentives
Provisions
Total non-current liabilities
Total liabilities
Net assets
Shareholders’ equity
Share capital
Share premium 
Investment in own shares
Other reserves
Retained earnings
Total equity attributable to equity holders of the Company

11
12
19

13
14
20
15

16
20
17

18

16
17
18

21
21
21
21

356.8
103.8
4.1
464.7

149.3
55.8
3.9
22.4
231.4
696.1

(22.9)
(0.1)
(181.4)
(12.4)
(10.6)
(227.4)
4.0

(61.3)
(31.5)
(8.2)
(101.0)
(328.4)
367.7

2.0
151.0
(13.6)
1.6
226.7
367.7

The notes on pages 89 to 111 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements on pages 77 to 82 were approved by the Board of Directors on 4 June 2015 and were signed on its behalf by: 

Andrew Findlay 
Chief Financial Officer

Company Number: 04457314 

342.2
95.2
4.4
441.8

150.2
52.8
—
5.3
208.3
650.1

(10.3)
(2.1)
(159.5)
(10.4)
(9.0)
(191.3)
17.0

(94.6)
(28.8)
(9.3)
(132.7)
(324.0)
326.1

2.0
151.0
(14.3)
(0.3)
187.7
326.1

79

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES 
IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Attributable to the equity holders of the Company

Other reserves

Share
capital
£m

2.0

Share
premium
account
£m

151.0

Investment
in own
shares 
£m

Capital
redemption 
reserve
£m

(13.2)

0.3

Hedging
reserve
£m

0.6

Retained
earnings
£m

158.0

Total
equity
£m

298.7

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
2.0

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
2.0

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
151.0

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
151.0

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

2.1
—
(3.2)

—
—
(1.1)
(14.3)

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

0.7
—
—

—
—
0.7
(13.6)

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
0.3

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—
—

—
—
—
0.3

—

55.5

55.5

(3.0)
1.1

(0.1)
0.8 

(1.2)

(1.2)

—
—
—

—
—
—
(0.6)

—
—

—
—

—

(3.0)
1.1

(0.1)
0.8

(1.2)

55.5

54.3

—
1.0
—

0.9
(27.7)
(25.8)
187.7

2.1
1.0
(3.2)

0.9
(27.7)
(26.9)
326.1

—

65.8

65.8

7.9
(1.4)

(3.4)
(1.2)

1.9

1.9

—
—
—

—
—
—
1.3

—
—

—
—

—

65.8

—
1.4
—

0.2
(28.4)
(26.8)
226.7

7.9
(1.4)

(3.4)
(1.2)

1.9

67.7

0.7
1.4
–

0.2
(28.4)
(26.1)
367.7

Balance at 29 March 2013 
Total comprehensive income for the 
period
Profit for the period
Other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges:
  Fair value changes in the period
  Transfers to inventory
Transfers to net profit:
  Cost of sales
Income tax on other comprehensive income
Total other comprehensive income for 
the period net of tax
Total comprehensive income for the 
period
Transactions with owners 
Share options exercised
Share-based payment transactions
Purchase of own shares
Income tax on share-based payment 
transactions
Dividends to equity holders
Total transactions with owners
Balance at 28 March 2014
Total comprehensive income for the 
period
Profit for the period
Other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges:
  Fair value changes in the period
  Transfers to inventory
Transfers to net profit:
  Cost of sales
Income tax on other comprehensive income
Total other comprehensive income for 
the period net of tax
Total comprehensive income for the 
period
Transactions with owners 
Share options exercised
Share-based payment transactions
Purchase of own shares
Income tax on share-based payment 
transactions
Dividends to equity holders
Total transactions with owners
Balance at 3 April 2015

The notes on pages 89 to 111 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

80

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF 
CASH FLOWS

53 weeks to
3 April 
2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

Notes

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit after tax for the period, before non-recurring items
Non-recurring items
Profit after tax for the period
Depreciation — property, plant and equipment
Impairment charge
Amortisation — intangible assets
Net finance costs
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Equity-settled share based payment transactions
Fair value (gain)/loss on derivative financial instruments
Income tax expense
Decrease/(increase) in inventories
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables
Increase in provisions
Finance income received
Finance costs paid 
Income tax paid 
Net cash from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiary, net of cash acquired
Purchase of intangible assets
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Net proceeds from exercise of share options
Purchase of own shares
Proceeds from loans, net of transaction costs
Repayment of borrowings
Payment of finance lease liabilities
Dividends paid 
Net cash used in financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and bank overdrafts
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

The notes on pages 89 to 105 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

66.2
(0.4)
65.8
20.2
0.7
5.5
3.5
1.7
1.4
(2.0)
18.0
0.9
(3.0)
27.2
0.5
0.1
(3.2)
(17.1)
120.2

(14.0)
(7.5)
(32.1)
(53.6)

0.7
—
220.2
(254.0)
(0.3)
(28.4)
(61.8)

4.8
(4.7)
0.1

10

I.

I.

55.8
(0.3)
55.5
18.0
0.4
5.3
5.0
2.1
1.0
1.4
17.1
(17.0)
1.0
10.7
6.7
0.2
(4.6)
(35.3)
67.5

—
(5.3)
(21.4)
(26.7)

2.1
(3.2)
305.7
(326.0)
(0.3)
(27.7)
(49.4)

(8.6)
3.9
(4.7)

81

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT 
OF CASH FLOWS

I. ANALYSIS OF MOVEMENTS IN THE GROUP’S NET DEBT IN THE PERIOD

Cash and cash equivalents at bank and in hand 
Debt due after one year
Total net debt excluding finance leases

Finance leases due within one year
Finance lease due after one year
Total finance leases
Total net debt

At 28 March 
2014
£m

Cash flow
£m

Other non-cash 
changes
£m

At 3 April 
2015
£m

(4.7)
(84.0)
(88.7)

(0.3)
(10.6)
(10.9)
(99.6)

4.8
33.9
38.7

0.3
—
0.3
39.0

—
(0.6)
(0.6)

(0.6)
—
(0.6)
(1.2)

0.1
(50.7)
(50.6)

(0.6)
(10.6)
(11.2)
(61.8)

Non-cash changes include finance costs in relation to the amortisation of capitalised debt issue costs of £0.6m (2014: £1.0m) and changes in classification 
between amounts due within and after one year.

Cash and cash equivalents at the period end consist of £22.4m (2014: £5.3m) of liquid assets and £22.3m (2014: £10.0m) of bank overdrafts.

82

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ACCOUNTING
POLICIES

GENERAL INFORMATION
Halfords Group plc is a company domiciled in the United Kingdom. The consolidated financial statements of the Company as at and for the period ended  
3 April 2015 comprise the Company and its subsidiary undertakings. 

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE 
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU  
(“adopted IFRSs”).

BASIS OF PREPARATION
The consolidated financial statements of Halfords Group plc and its subsidiary undertakings (together “the Group”) are prepared on a going concern basis 
for the reasons set out in the Directors’ Report on page 41, and under the historical cost convention, except where adopted IFRSs require an alternative 
treatment. The principal variations relate to financial instruments (IAS 39 “Financial instruments: recognition and measurement”) and share based payments 
(IFRS 2 “Share-based payment”). 

The financial statements are presented in millions of UK pounds, rounded to the nearest £0.1m.

The accounts of the Group are prepared for the period up to the Friday closest to 31 March each year. Consequently, the financial statements for the current 
period cover the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015, whilst the comparative period covered the 52 weeks to 28 March 2014. 

BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION
SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS 
Subsidiary undertakings are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They cease to be consolidated from the date that the 
Group no longer has control. Control is achieved where the Company has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain 
benefits from its activities. 

Inter-company transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies are eliminated on consolidation. Unrealised losses are 
also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred.

The financial statements of all subsidiary undertakings are prepared to the same reporting date as the Company. All subsidiary undertakings have been 
consolidated.

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Company at 3 April 2015 are detailed in note 4 to the Company balance sheet on page 109.

BUSINESS COMBINATIONS
The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for using the purchase method. The cost of the acquisition is measured at the aggregate of the fair values, at 
the date of exchange, of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed, and equity instruments issued by the group in exchange for control of the acquiree. 
Acquisition related costs are recognised as expenses in the period in which the costs are incurred.

The identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired entity that meet the conditions for recognition under IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ 
are recognised at their fair value at the acquisition date. 

Goodwill arising on acquisition is recognised as an asset and initially measured at cost, being the excess of the cost of the business combination over the 
group’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities recognised. If, after reassessment, the Group’s interest in the net 
fair value of these elements exceeds the cost of the business combination, the excess is recognised immediately in the income statement.

REVENUE RECOGNITION
RETAIL 
Retail revenue comprises the fair value of the sale of goods and services to external customers, net of value added tax, rebates, promotions and returns. 
Revenue is recognised on the sale of goods when the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods have passed to the buyer and the amount of 
revenue can be measured reliably. Revenue on goods delivered is recognised when the customer accepts delivery and on services when those services have 
been rendered.

CAR SERVICING
Car Servicing revenue comprises the provision of servicing to external customers, net of value added tax, rebates and promotions. Revenue is recognised at 
the point at which those services have been rendered. 

PROMOTIONS AND RETURNS
The Group operates a variety of sales promotion schemes that give rise to goods and services being sold at a discount to standard retail price. Revenue is 
adjusted to show sales net of all related discounts. A provision for estimated returns is made representing the profit on goods sold during the year which are 
expected to be returned and refunded after the year end based on past experience. Revenue is reduced by the value of sales returns provided for during the year.

FINANCE INCOME
Finance income comprises interest income on funds invested. Income is recognised, as it accrues in profit or loss, using the effective interest rate method.

NON-RECURRING ITEMS
Non-recurring items are those items that are unusual because of their size, nature or incidence. The Group’s management consider that these items should be 
separately identified within their relevant income statement category to enable a full understanding of the Group’s results.

83

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ACCOUNTING
POLICIES continued

EARNINGS PER SHARE
The Group presents basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS) data for its ordinary shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable 
to ordinary shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period, adjusted for own shares 
held. Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary shares 
outstanding, adjusted for own shares held, for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares, which comprise share options granted to employees.

The Group has also chosen to present an alternative earnings per share measure, with profit adjusted for non-recurring items. A reconciliation of this alternative 
measure to the statutory measure required by IFRS is given in note 9.

FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSLATION
FUNCTIONAL AND PRESENTATION CURRENCY
The consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Group’s presentation currency and are rounded to the nearest hundred 
thousand, except where it is deemed relevant to disclose the amounts to the nearest pound. Items included in the financial statements of the Group’s entities 
are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (the functional currency).

TRANSACTIONS AND BALANCES
Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transaction. At each balance sheet date, monetary assets 
and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the exchange rate prevailing at the balance sheet date. Translation differences on monetary 
items are taken to the income statement with the exception of differences on transactions that are subject to effective cash flow hedges, which are recognised 
in other comprehensive income.

Non-monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies that are measured at fair value are retranslated at the exchange rate at the date that the 
fair value was determined. Foreign currency differences arising on retranslation are recognised in profit or loss, except for differences arising on qualifying cash 
flow hedges, which are recognised in other comprehensive income. 

The assets and liabilities of foreign operations are translated to sterling at the exchange rate at the reporting date. The income and expenses of foreign 
operations are translated to sterling at an average exchange rate. Foreign currency differences are recognised in other comprehensive income and a separate 
component of equity. When a foreign operation is disposed of, the relevant amount in equity is transferred to profit or loss.

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
I) PENSIONS
The Halfords Pension Plan is a contract based plan, where each member has their own individual pension policy, which they monitor independently. The 
Group pays fixed contributions and has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. The costs of contributions to the scheme are charged to the 
income statement in the period that they arise.

II) SHARE BASED PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS
The Group operates a number of equity-settled share based compensation plans.

The fair value of the employee services received under such schemes is recognised as an expense in the income statement. Fair values are determined by use 
of an appropriate pricing model and incorporate an assessment of relevant market performance conditions.

The amount to be expensed over the vesting period is adjusted to reflect the number of awards for which the related service and non-market vesting 
conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based on the number of awards that meet the related service 
and non-market performance conditions at the vesting date.

At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of share incentives that are expected to vest. The impact of the revision of original 
estimates, if any, is recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

TAXATION
Income tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current tax and deferred tax are recognised in profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to a 
business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or in other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted, at the 
reporting date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

The tax base of an asset is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against any taxable economic benefits that will flow to an entity when it 
recovers the carrying amount of the asset. If those economic benefits will not be taxable, the tax base of the asset is equal to its carrying amount.

The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount, less any amount that will be deductible for tax purposes in respect of that liability in future periods. In the case 
of revenue which is received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount, less any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in 
future periods.

Deferred taxation is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying 
amounts in the consolidated financial statements. However, if the deferred taxation arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction other 
than a business combination, that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss, it is not accounted for. Deferred taxation is 
calculated using rates that are expected to apply when the related deferred asset is realised or the deferred taxation liability is settled.

Deferred taxation assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can 
be utilised.

84

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015DIVIDENDS
Final dividends are recognised in the Group’s financial statements in the period in which the dividends are approved by shareholders. Interim equity dividends 
are recognised in the period they are paid.

INTANGIBLE ASSETS
I) GOODWILL 
Goodwill is initially recognised as an asset at cost and is reviewed for impairment at least annually. Goodwill is subsequently measured at cost less any 
accumulated impairment losses. An impairment charge is recognised in profit or loss for any amount by which the carrying value of goodwill exceeds its 
recoverable amount.

For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to each of the Group’s cash-generating units expected to benefit from the synergies of the 
combination. Cash-generating units to which goodwill has been allocated are tested for impairment annually, or more frequently when there is an indication 
that the unit may be impaired.

For acquisitions prior to 3 April 2010 costs directly attributable to business combinations formed part of the consideration payable when calculating goodwill. 
Adjustments to contingent consideration, and therefore the consideration payable and goodwill, are made at each reporting date until the consideration is 
finally determined.

Acquisitions after this date fall under the provisions of ‘Revised IFRS 3 Business Combinations (2009)’. For these acquisitions transaction costs, other than 
share and debt issue costs, will be expensed as incurred and subsequent adjustments to the fair value of consideration payable will be recognised in profit  
or loss.

II) COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Costs that are directly associated with identifiable and unique software products controlled by the Group, and that will generate economic benefits beyond 
one year are recognised as intangible assets. These intangible assets are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Software is 
amortised over three to five years depending on the estimated useful economic life.

III) ACQUIRED INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Intangible assets that are acquired as a result of a business combination are recorded at fair value at the acquisition date, provided they are identifiable and 
capable of reliable measurement. 

Amortisation is recognised in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of intangible assets, other than goodwill, from the date that 
they are available for use, since this most closely reflects the expected pattern of consumption of the future economic benefits embodied in the asset. The 
estimated useful lives for the current and comparative periods are as follows:

•	 Brand names and trademarks 2 years, in respect of Autocentres, and 10 years in respect of cBoardman;

•	 Customer relationships 5 to 15 years; and

•	 Favourable leases over the term of the lease.

Amortisation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each financial year-end and adjusted if appropriate.

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property, plant and equipment is held at cost less accumulated depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses.

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is provided to write off the cost, less residual value, on a straight-line basis over their useful economic lives as 
follows:

•	 Leasehold premises with lease terms of 50 years or less are depreciated over the remaining period of the lease;

•	 Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the period of the lease to a maximum of 25 years;

•	 Motor vehicles are depreciated over 3 years;

•	 Fixtures, fittings and equipment are depreciated over 4 to 10 years according to the estimated life of the asset;

•	 Computer equipment is depreciated over 3 years; and

•	 Land is not depreciated. 

Depreciation is expensed to the income statement within operating expenses.

Residual values, remaining useful economic lives and depreciation periods and methods are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate. 

IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS
Tangible and intangible assets that are subject to amortisation and depreciation are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances 
indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds 
its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing 
impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash flows (cash-generating units). For goodwill, an annual 
impairment review is performed at each balance sheet date.

85

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ACCOUNTING
POLICIES continued

LEASES
FINANCE LEASES
Leases of property, plant and equipment where the Group has substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance 
leases are capitalised at the lease’s inception at the lower of the fair value of the leased asset and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Each 
lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance charges so as to achieve a constant rate on the finance balance outstanding. The corresponding 
rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in borrowings. The interest element of the rental is charged to the income statement over the lease 
period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. 

OPERATING LEASES
Leases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating leases. Payments made 
under operating leases are charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. The benefit of incentives from lessors are 
recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

LANDLORD SURRENDER PAYMENTS
Payments received from landlords in respect of the surrender of all or part of units previously occupied by the Group, that do not represent an incentive for 
future rental commitments are recognised in the income statement on the exchange of contracts, where there are no further substantial acts to complete.

SUBLEASE INCOME
The Group leases properties from which it no longer trades. These properties are often sublet to third parties. Rents receivable are recognised by offsetting the 
income against rental costs accounted for within selling and distribution costs in the income statement.

INVENTORIES
Inventories are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The cost of inventories is based on the weighted average cost principle and includes 
expenditure incurred in inventories, adjusted for rebates, and other costs incurred in bringing them to their existing location.

PROVISIONS 
A provision is recognised if, as a result of a past event, the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation that can be estimated reliably, and it is 
probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows 
at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. The unwinding of the discount is 
recognised as a finance cost.

Details of the provisions recognised and the significant estimates and judgements can be seen in note 18.

Where the Group expects a provision to be reimbursed, the reimbursement is recognised as a separate asset when the reimbursement is certain.

A provision for vacant properties is recognised when the expected benefits to be derived by the Group from a contract are lower than the unavoidable cost of 
meeting its obligations under the contract. The provision is measured at the present value of the lower of the expected cost of terminating the contract and the 
expected net cost of continuing with the contract. Before a provision is established, the Group recognises any impairment loss on the assets associated with 
that contract. The main uncertainty is the timing of the amounts payable, and the time value of money has been incorporated in to the provision amount to 
take account of this sensitivity.

Provision is also made for onerous contracts in loss-making stores and autocentres which management do not expect to become profitable.

A rent review provision is recognised when there is expected to be additional obligations as a result of the rent review, which forms part of the Group’s 
unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the lease contracts. The provision is based on management’s best estimate of the rent payable after the 
review. Key uncertainties are the estimate of the rent payable after the review has occurred.

A dilapidations provision is recognised when there is future obligation relating to the maintenance of leasehold properties. The provision is based on 
management’s best estimate of the obligation which forms part of the Group’s unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the lease contracts. Key 
uncertainties are the estimates of amounts due.

Provisions for employer and product liability claims are recognised when an incident occurs or when a claim made against the Group is received that could 
lead to there being an outflow of benefits from the Group. The provision is based on management’s best estimate of the settlement assisted by an external 
third party. The main uncertainty is the likelihood of success of the claimant and hence the pay-out however a provision is only recognised where there is 
considered to be reasonable grounds for the claim.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
FINANCIAL ASSETS
The Group’s financial assets include cash and cash equivalents and trade and other receivables. All financial assets are recognised when the Group becomes 
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

I) TRADE RECEIVABLES
Trade receivables are recognised and carried at original invoice amount less provision for impairment.

A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due 
according to the original terms of receivables. The amount of the provision is determined as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the 
present value of estimated future cash flows, and is recognised in the income statement in operating expenses. 

86

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015II) CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, deposits held at call with banks and other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three 
months or less. For the purpose of the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents includes bank overdrafts in addition to the definition above.

FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements entered into. An equity instrument is any 
contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after deducting all of its liabilities.

The Group’s financial liabilities comprise trade and other payables and borrowings. All financial liabilities are recognised initially at their fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

I) BANK BORROWINGS
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration received net of issue costs associated with the borrowing. Borrowings are 
subsequently stated at amortised cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income 
statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Finance cost comprises interest expense on borrowings, unwinding of the discount on provisions and the cost of forward foreign exchange contracts. 

II) TRADE PAYABLES
Trade payables are initially measured at fair value, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost, using the effective interest rate method.

III) EQUITY INSTRUMENTS
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded as the proceeds are received, net of direct issue costs. Own shares consist of shares held within an 
employee benefit trust and are recognised at cost as a deduction from shareholders’ equity. Subsequent consideration received for the sale of such shares is 
also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds from the original cost being taken to revenue reserves. No gain or loss is recognised 
in the Group Income Statement on transactions in own shares held.

IV) DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND HEDGE ACCOUNTING
Derivative financial instruments are used to manage risks arising from changes in foreign currency exchange rates relating to the purchase of overseas sourced 
products. The Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for trading purposes. The Group uses the derivatives to hedge highly probable 
forecast transactions and therefore the instruments are designated as cash flow hedges. 

Derivatives are recognised at fair value on the date a contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured at their fair value. The effective element of any 
gain or loss from re-measuring the derivative instrument is recognised directly in the hedging reserve.

The associated cumulative gain or loss is reclassified from the Group Statement of Changes in Equity and recognised in the Group Income Statement in 
the same period or periods during which the hedged transaction affects the Group Income Statement. Any element of the re-measurement of the derivative 
instrument that does not meet the criteria for an effective hedge is recognised immediately in the Group Income Statement within finance income or costs.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in other 
comprehensive income at that time remains in other comprehensive income and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the 
income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in other comprehensive income 
is recognised immediately in profit or loss.

The full fair value of a hedging derivative is classified as a non-current asset or liability if the remaining maturity of the hedged item is more than twelve months 
or as a current asset or liability, if the remaining maturity of the hedged item is less than 12 months.

ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS
The preparation of the consolidated financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of 
policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience 
and various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis of making judgements about the 
carrying value of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from the estimates.

The judgement and key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant effect on the amounts recognised in the financial statements are detailed 
below:

ALLOWANCES AGAINST THE CARRYING VALUE OF INVENTORIES
The Group reviews the market value of and demand for its inventories on a periodic basis to ensure that recorded inventory is stated at the lower of cost and 
net realisable value. In assessing the ultimate realisation of inventories, the Group is required to make judgements as to future demand requirements and to 
compare these with the current or committed inventory levels. Assumptions have been made relating to the timing and success of product ranges, which 
would impact estimated demand and selling prices.

Sensitivities to the assumptions for specific product lines are not expected by management to result in a material change in the overall allowances.

INTANGIBLE ASSET VALUATIONS
The measurement of fair values on a business combination requires the recognition and measurement of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities. The key judgements involved are the identification of which intangible assets meet the recognition criteria as set out in IAS 38, the fair values 
attributable to those intangible assets, excluding any buyer-specific synergies, and the useful lives of individual intangible assets. The useful lives of intangibles 
assets relating to customer relationships involves judgement as to customer retention rates applicable. 

87

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ACCOUNTING
POLICIES continued

IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS
Goodwill and other assets are subject to impairment reviews based on whether current or future events and circumstances suggest that their recoverable 
value may be less than their carrying value. Recoverable amount is based on a calculation of expected future cash flows, which includes management 
assumptions and estimates of future performance. Details of the assumptions used in the impairment review of goodwill and other assets are explained in  
note 11.

The carrying amount of these assets and liabilities can be seen in the notes to the financial statements on pages 89 to 111.

ADOPTION OF NEW AND REVISED STANDARDS
The following standards and interpretations are applicable to the Group and have been adopted in the current period as they are mandatory for the year ended 
3 April 2015 but either have no material impact on the result or net assets of the Group or are not applicable.

•	

•	

•	

IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated financial statements’ replaces the guidance of control and consolidation in IAS 27 and SIC 32: Consolidation – special purpose 
entities. The core principle that a consolidated entity presents a parent and its subsidiaries as if they were a single entity remains unchanged, as do the 
mechanics of the consolidation.

IFRS 11 ‘Joint arrangements’ requires joint arrangements to be accounted for as a joint operation or as a joint venture depending on the rights and 
obligations of each party to the arrangement. Proportionate consolidation for joint ventures will be eliminated and equity accounting will be mandatory.

IFRS 12: ‘Disclosure of interests in other entities’ requires enhanced disclosures of the nature, risks and financial effects associated with the Group’s 
interests in subsidiaries, associates, joint arrangements and unconsolidated structures entities.

NEW STANDARDS AND INTERPRETATIONS NOT YET ADOPTED
The following standards and interpretations have been published, endorsed by the EU, and are available for early adoption, but have not yet been applied by 
the Group in these financial statements. The Group does not believe the adoption of these standards or interpretations would have a material impact on the 
consolidated results or financial position of the Group.

•	

•	

IAS 32 ‘Financial instruments – presentation’ (Amendment) – the amendment clarifies the offsetting criteria, specifically: when an entity currently has a legal 
right of set off; and when gross settlement is equivalent to net settlement.

IAS 36 ‘Impairment of assets’ (Amendment) – the amendments reverse the unintended requirement in IFRS 13 to disclose the recoverable amount of every 
cash-generating unit to which significant goodwill or indefinite-lived intangible assets have been allocated. Under the amendments, recoverable amount is 
required to be disclosed only when an impairment loss has been recognised or reversed.

In addition to the above, amendments to a number of standards under the annual improvements project to IFRS have been endorsed by the EU but not yet 
adopted. None of these amendments are expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements.

88

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1.  OPERATING SEGMENTS
The Group has two reportable segments, Retail and Car Servicing, which are the Group’s strategic business units. Car Servicing became a reporting segment 
of the Group as a result of the acquisition of Nationwide Autocentres on 17 February 2010. The strategic business units offer different products and services, 
and are managed separately because they require different operational, technological and marketing strategies. 

The operations of the Retail reporting segment comprise the retailing of automotive, leisure and cycling products through retail stores. The operations of the 
Car Servicing reporting segment comprise car servicing and repair performed from autocentres. 

The Chief Operating Decision Maker is the Executive Directors. Internal management reports for each of the segments are reviewed by the Executive Directors 
on a monthly basis. Key measures used to evaluate performance are Revenue and Operating Profit. Management believe that these measures are the most 
relevant in evaluating the performance of the segment and for making resource allocation decisions. 

The following summary describes the operations in each of the Group’s reportable segments. Performance is measured based on segment operating profit, 
as included in the management reports that are reviewed by the Executive Directors. These internal reports are prepared in accordance with IFRS accounting 
policies consistent with these Group Financial Statements. 

All material operations of the reportable segments are carried out in the UK and all material non-current assets are located in the UK. The Group’s revenue is 
driven by the consolidation of individual small value transactions and as a result Group revenue is not reliant on a major customer or Group of customers. All 
revenue is from external customers.

Income statement

Revenue
Segment result before non-recurring items
Non-recurring items
Segment result 
Unallocated expenses1
Operating profit
Net financing expense
Profit before tax
Taxation
Profit for the year

Retail 
£m

875.1
85.4
(0.3)
85.1

Car Servicing
£m

150.3
4.1
—
4.1

53 weeks to 
3 April
 2015
Total
£m

1,025.4
89.5
(0.3)
89.2
(1.9)
87.3
(3.5)
83.8
(18.0)
65.8

1.  Unallocated expenses have been disclosed to reflect the format of the internal management reports reviewed by the Chief Operating Decision maker and include an amortisation charge of £1.9m 

in respect of assets acquired through business combinations (2014: £1.7m).

Income statement

Revenue
Segment result before non-recurring items
Non-recurring items
Segment result 
Unallocated expenses1
Operating profit
Net financing expense
Profit before tax
Taxation
Profit for the year

Retail 
£m

803.1
75.2
(0.2)
75.0

Car Servicing
£m

136.6
4.3
—
4.3

52 weeks to 
28 March 
2014
Total
£m

939.7
79.5
(0.2)
79.3
(1.7)
77.6
(5.0)
72.6
(17.1)
55.5

89

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

1.  OPERATING SEGMENTS CONTINUED

Other segment items:

Capital expenditure
Depreciation expense
Impairment charge (non-recurring)
Amortisation expense

Other segment items:

Capital expenditure
Depreciation expense
Impairment charge (non-recurring)
Amortisation expense

Retail 
£m

Car Servicing
£m

30.7
16.4
0.7
3.6

6.8
3.8
—
—

Retail 
£m

Car Servicing
£m

53 weeks to 
3 April 
2015
Total
£m

37.5
20.2
0.7
3.6

52 weeks to 28 
March 2014
Total
£m

24.4
14.8
0.4
3.6

6.0
3.2
—
—

30.4
18.0
0.4
3.6

There have been no significant transactions between segments in the 53 weeks ended 3 April 2015 (2014: £nil). 

2.  OPERATING EXPENSES

For the period

Selling and distribution costs

Administrative expenses, before non-recurring items
Non-recurring administrative expenses

3.  OPERATING PROFIT

For the period

Operating profit is arrived at after charging/(crediting) the following expenses/(income) as categorised by nature:
Operating lease rentals:
— plant and machinery
— property rents
— rentals receivable under operating leases
Landlord surrender payments
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
Depreciation of:
— owned property, plant and equipment
— assets held under finance leases
Impairment of property, plant and equipment
Trade receivables impairment
Staff costs (see note 4)
Cost of inventories consumed in cost of sales

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

385.5
385.5
73.2
0.3
73.5
459.0

359.1
359.1
67.3
0.2
67.5
426.6

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

2.6
91.6
(4.2)
(2.8)
1.7
5.5

19.7
0.5
0.7
—
203.1
470.2

1.8
90.0
(5.0)
(3.4)
2.1
5.3

17.5
0.5
0.4
0.3
189.2
422.2

The total fees payable by the Group to KPMG LLP and their associates during the period was £0.2m (2014: £0.2m), in respect of the services detailed below: 

For the period

Fees payable for the audit of the Company’s accounts
Fees payable to KPMG LLP and their associates for other services:
The audit of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings, pursuant to legislation
Other services supplied pursuant to such legislation

90

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£’000

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£’000

30

144
15
189

30

144
15
189

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 20154.  STAFF COSTS

For the period

The aggregated remuneration of all employees including Directors comprised:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Equity settled share-based payment transactions (note 22)
Contributions to defined contribution plans (note 24)

Average number of persons employed by the Group, including directors, during the period:
Stores/Autocentres
Central warehousing
Support Centre

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

183.7
12.9
1.4
5.1
203.1

173.0
11.6
1.0
3.6
189.2

Number

Number

10,124
375
722
11,221

10,697
313
684
11,694

Full details of Directors’ remuneration and interests are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 70 which form part of these financial 
statements.

KEY MANAGEMENT COMPENSATION

For the period

Salaries and short-term benefits
Compensation for loss of office
Social security costs
Pensions
Share based payment charge

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

3.0
0.1
0.8
0.3
0.5
4.7

2.5
0.2
0.6
0.3
0.5
4.1

Key management compensation includes the emoluments of the Board of Directors and the emoluments of the Halfords Limited and Halfords Autocentres 
management boards. 

5.  NON-RECURRING ITEMS

For the period

Non-recurring operating expenses:
Lease guarantee provision (a)
Onerous lease provision (b)
Impairment of Property, Plant and Equipment (c)
Non-recurring items before tax
Tax on non-recurring items (d)
Non-recurring items after tax

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

(0.2)
(0.2)
0.7
0.3
0.1
0.4

(0.2)
—
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.3

a.  A non-recurring expense of £7.5m was incurred in 2011. This expense related to the creation of a provision for the potential liabilities arising from lease 

guarantees provided by Halfords prior to July 1989. The guarantees were provided to landlords of properties leased by Payless DIY (now part of Focus DIY) 
when both Halfords and Payless DIY were under ownership of the Ward White Group. Focus DIY entered into administration in May 2011. In the current 
year the continued settlement of the Group’s guarantor obligations has resulted in a release of £0.2m (2014: £0.2m) of the original amounts provided. 
There is now no outstanding provision in relation to this issue.

b.  A charge was incurred in prior periods relating to stores where the present value of expected future cash flows was deemed to be insufficient to cover the 

lower of cost of exit or value in use. During the current year a release of £0.2m occurred following the finalisation of an exit agreement for the Wembley store.

c.  Impairment charge in respect of property, plant and equipment, in respect of the Stores Fit To Shop initiative, where the carrying amount of these assets 

has been deemed to exceed the recoverable amount.

d.  The tax charge of £0.1m represents a tax rate of 21% applied to non-recurring items after adjusting for the non-deductibility of the asset impairment 
charge and settlements to release Halfords from its guarantor obligations under the leases. The prior period represents a tax charge at 23% on all 
current year non-recurring items adjusted for the non-deductibility of the asset impairment charge and settlements to release Halfords from its guarantor 
obligations under the leases.

91

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

6.  FINANCE INCOME AND COSTS

Recognised in profit or loss for the period 

Finance costs:
Bank borrowings
Amortisation of issue costs on loans 
Commitment and guarantee fees
Costs of forward foreign exchange contracts
Interest payable on finance leases
Other interest payable
Finance costs

Finance income: 
Bank and similar interest
Finance income
Net finance costs

7.  TAXATION 

For the period

Current taxation
UK corporation tax charge for the period
Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Deferred taxation
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Total tax charge for the period

The tax charge is reconciled with the standard rate of UK corporation tax as follows:

For the period

Profit before tax
UK corporation tax at standard rate of 21% (2014: 23%)
Factors affecting the charge for the period:
Depreciation on expenditure not eligible for tax relief
Employee share options
Other disallowable expenses
Adjustment in respect of prior periods
Impact of overseas tax rates
Impact of change in tax rate on deferred tax balance
Total tax charge for the period

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

(1.3)
(0.6)
(0.8)
(0.2)
(0.7)
—
(3.6)

0.1
0.1
(3.5)

(1.3)
(1.0)
(1.1)
(0.3)
(0.7)
(0.8)
(5.2)

0.2
0.2
(5.0)

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

20.9
(1.8)
19.1

(1.5)
0.4
(1.1)
18.0

20.1
(0.7)
19.4

(1.8)
(0.5)
(2.3)
17.1

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

83.8
17.6

1.3
0.4
0.4
(1.4)
(0.4)
0.1
18.0

72.6
16.7

1.5
(0.5)
0.4
(1.2)
(0.5)
0.7
17.1

A reduction in the UK corporation tax from 24% to 23% (effective 1 April 2013) was substantively enacted on 3 July 2012. Further reductions to 21% (effective 
from 1 April 2014) and 20% (effective from 1 April 2015) were substantively enacted on 2 July 2013. This will reduce the Company’s future current tax charge 
accordingly. The deferred tax asset at 3 April 2015 has been calculated based on the rate of 20% substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. 

In this financial period, the UK corporation tax rate was 21% (2014: 23%).

The effective tax rate of 21.5% (2014: 23.5%) is higher than the UK corporation tax rate principally due to the non-deductibility of depreciation charged on 
capital expenditure and other permanent differences arising in the period. 

The tax charge on profit for the financial period was £18.0m (2014: £17.1m), including a £0.1m charge (2014: £0.1m charge) in respect of tax on non-
recurring items.

92

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 20157.  TAXATION CONTINUED
An income tax charge of £1.2m (2014: £0.8m credit) on other comprehensive income relates to the movement in fair valuing forward currency contracts 
outstanding at the year end. No other items within other comprehensive income have a tax impact.

The Group engages openly and proactively with tax authorities both in the UK and internationally, where it trades and sources products, and is considered low 
risk by HM Revenue and Customs (“HMRC”). The Company is fully committed to complying with all of its tax payment and reporting obligations. 

In this period, the Group’s contribution to the UK Exchequer from both taxes paid and collected exceeded £149.0m (2014: £157.9m) with the main taxes 
including corporation tax £16.1m (2014: £35.4m), net VAT £53.1m (2014: 49.8m), PAYE £19.8m (2014: £17.1m), employees national insurance contributions 
£10.0m (2014: £8.8m), employers national insurance contributions £13.0m (2014: £11.2m) and business rates £37.0m (2014: £35.6m).

8.  DIVIDENDS

For the period

Equity — ordinary shares
Final for the 52 weeks to 28 March 2014 — paid 9.10p per share (2014: 9.10p)
Interim for the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015 — paid 5.50p per share (2014: 5.20p)

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

17.7
10.7
28.4

17.6
10.1
27.7

In addition, the directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial period ended 3 April 2015 of 11.00p per share (2014: 9.10p per share), which 
will absorb an estimated £21.4m (2014: £17.7m) of shareholders’ funds. It will be paid on 28 August 2015 to shareholders who are on the register of members 
on 7 August 2015.

9.  EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing the profit attributable to ordinary shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue 
during the period. The weighted average number of shares excludes shares held by an Employee Benefit Trust (see note 21) and has been adjusted for the 
issue/purchase of shares during the period. 

For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of all dilutive potential ordinary 
shares. These represent share options granted to employees where the exercise price is less than the average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares 
during the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015. 

The Group has also chosen to present an alternative earnings per share measure, with profit adjusted for non-recurring items because it better reflects the 
Group’s underlying performance.

For the period

Weighted average number of shares in issue
Less: shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust (weighted average)
Weighted average number of shares for calculating basic earnings per share
Weighted average number of dilutive shares 
Total number of shares for calculating diluted earnings per share

For the period

Basic earnings attributable to equity shareholders
Non-recurring items (see note 5):
  Operating expenses
  Tax on non-recurring items
Underlying earnings before non-recurring items

Earnings per share is calculated as follows:

For the period

Basic earnings per ordinary share
Diluted earnings per ordinary share
Basic earnings per ordinary share before non-recurring items
Diluted earnings per ordinary share before non-recurring items

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
Number of 
shares
m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
Number of 
shares
m

199.1
(4.9)
194.2
3.2
197.4

199.1
(5.1)
194.0
2.9
196.9

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014
£m

65.8

0.3
0.1
66.2

55.5

0.2
0.1
55.8

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015

52 weeks to
28 March 
2014

33.8p
33.3p
34.1p
33.5p

28.6p
28.2p
28.8p
28.4p

93

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

10.  ACQUISITION OF SUBSIDIARY
On 4 June 2014 the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Boardman Bikes Limited and Boardman International Limited for cash consideration 
of £14.7m (excluding transaction costs). The two Boardman companies retail cycles and cycle accessories under the brand name ‘cBoardman’ nationally and 
internationally. The purpose of this acquisition was to benefit from operating synergies. This transaction has been accounted for using the acquisition method 
of accounting.

The acquisition had the following effect on the Group’s assets and liabilities:

Book value
£m

Fair value 
adjustment
£m

Final fair value
£m 

Boardman net assets at the acquisition date
Intangible assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash
Trade and other payables
Current tax liabilities
Boardman net assets

GOODWILL
Goodwill was recognised as a result of the acquisition as follows:

Total consideration
Less fair value of identifiable assets
Goodwill and intangible assets

Brand name intangible
Deferred tax liability
Goodwill

0.2
0.7
3.7
0.7
(3.0)
(0.2)
2.1

(0.2)
—
(0.4)
—
—
—
(0.6)

—
0.7
3.3
0.7
(3.0)
(0.2)
1.5

£m

14.7
(1.5)
13.2

3.1
(0.6)
10.7

The goodwill arising on the acquisition of the Boardman business is attributable to a) operating synergies and increased control of operations, b) the value of 
immaterial other intangible assets and c) future income to be generated from new retail customer contracts and related relationships. None of the goodwill is 
expected to be deductible for income tax purposes.

The fair value adjustments relate to the best estimate of the contractual trade receivable cash flows not expected to be collected and aligning intangible asset 
policies with the Halfords Group.

The Boardman business contributed £2.4m revenue and a loss of £0.3m to the Group’s profit before tax for the period between the date of acquisition and the 
balance sheet date. The Retail segment has benefited by £1.7m due to the change in royalty arrangements following acquisition. 

If the acquisition of the Boardman business had been completed on the first day of the financial year, Group revenues for the period would have been 
£2.2m higher and Group profit attributable to equity holders of the parent would have been £0.1m higher (pre amortisation of intangible assets arising on 
consolidation).

94

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201511.  INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Cost
At 29 March 2013
Additions
Disposals
At 28 March 2014
Additions
Disposals
Transfer to tangible assets
At 3 April 2015
Amortisation
At 29 March 2013
Charge for the period
Disposals
At 28 March 2014
Charge for the period
Disposals
At 3 April 2015
Net book value at 3 April 2015
Net book value at 28 March 2014

Brand 
names and 
trademarks
£m

Customer 
relationships
£m

Favourable 
leases 
£m

Computer 
software
£m

Goodwill
£m

1.1
—
—
1.1
3.1
—
—
4.2

1.1
—
—
1.1
0.2
—
1.3
2.9
—

14.9
—
—
14.9
—
—
—
14.9

5.3
1.6
—
6.9
1.6
—
8.5
6.4
8.0

2.3
—
—
2.3
—
—
—
2.3

0.2
0.1
—
0.3
0.1
—
0.4
1.9
2.0

15.5
5.3
(1.9)
18.9
7.5
(0.7)
(0.6)
25.1

7.8
3.6
(1.9)
9.5
3.6
(0.1)
13.0
12.1
9.4

344.5
—
—
344.5
10.7
—
—
355.2

21.7
—
—
21.7
—
—
21.7
333.5
322.8

Total
£m

378.3
5.3
(1.9)
381.7
21.3
(0.7)
(0.6)
401.7

36.1
5.3
(1.9)
39.5
5.5
(0.1)
44.9
356.8
342.2

No intangible assets are held as security for external borrowings.

Included in computer software are internally generated assets of £nil (2014: £0.3m). Product rights of £0.2m, which are fully amortised, have been included 
within Brand names and trademarks.

Goodwill of £253.1m (2014: £253.1m) arose on the acquisition of Halfords Holdings Limited by the Company on 31 August 2002 and is allocated to the 
Retail segment. The goodwill relates to a portfolio of sites within the UK which management monitors on an overall basis as a group of cash-generating units 
being Retail. Goodwill of £69.7m arose on the acquisition of Nationwide Autocentres on 17 February 2010 and is allocated to the Car Servicing segment. 
The goodwill relates to a portfolio of centres within the UK which management monitors on an overall basis as a group of cash-generating units being Car 
Servicing. Goodwill of £10.7m arose on the acquisition of Boardman Bikes Limited and Boardman International Limited on 4 June 2014 and is allocated to the 
Retail segment. The goodwill relates to the two Boardman entities which management monitors on an overall basis as a group of cash-generating units known 
as Boardman Bikes.

The goodwill arising on the acquisition of the Nationwide Autocentres is attributable to a) future income to be generated from new retail, fleet customer 
contracts and related relationships, b) the workforce, c) the value of immaterial other intangible assets and d) operating synergies. The goodwill on acquisition 
of the Boardman Bikes is attributable: to a) operating synergies and increased control of operations; b) the value of immaterial other intangible assets; and  
c) future income to be generated from new retail customer contracts and related relationships.

The recoverable amount of goodwill is determined based on “value-in-use” calculations for each of the three groups of cash-generating units, being Retail, 
Car Servicing and Boardman Bikes. This is the lowest level within the Group at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes, which is 
not higher than the Group’s operating segments as reported in note 1. These calculations use cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by 
management covering a three-year period with growth no higher than past experience and after consideration of all available information, incorporating the 
strategies and risks of each segment. 

The value-in-use of the goodwill held at 3 April 2015 and 28 March 2014 is driven by, and is most sensitive to, the key assumptions underlying the Group 
cash-generating units recoverable amounts as follows:

Discount rate
Growth rate

Notes:
1.  Pre-tax discount rate applied to the cash flow projections.
2.  Growth rate used to extrapolate cash flows beyond the three year budget period.

Retail

Car Servicing

Note

1
2

2015

7.3%
0.0%

2014

7.9%
0.0%

2015

8.3%
1.0%

2014

10.3%
1.0%

The directors are confident that a reasonably possible change in the key assumptions, including a +/- 1.0% change in the discount rate, would not cause the 
carrying amounts to exceed the recoverable amounts. 

95

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

12.  TANGIBLE ASSETS 

Cost 
At 29 March 2013
Additions
Disposals
Reclassifications 
At 28 March 2014
Additions
Disposals
Reclassifications 
Transfer from intangible assets
At 3 April 2015
Depreciation
At 29 March 2013
Depreciation for the period
Impairment charge
Disposals
At 28 March 2014
Depreciation for the period
Impairment charge
Disposals
At 3 April 2015
Net book value at 3 April 2015
Net book value at 28 March 2014

No fixed assets are held as security for external borrowings.

Included in the above are assets held under finance leases as follows: 

As at 3 April 2015
Cost 
Additions
Accumulated depreciation
Net book value
As at 28 March 2014
Cost 
Accumulated depreciation
Net book value

1.  Relates to the Halfords support centre building lease, which expires in 2028.

Finance lease liabilities are payable as follows:

Minimum 
lease 
payments
2015
£m

1.4
5.1
10.2
16.7

Interest
2015
£m

Principle
2015
£m

0.8
2.4
2.3
5.5

0.6
2.7
7.9
11.2

Less than one year
Between one and five years
More than five years

96

Fixtures,
fittings
and
equipment
£m

Payments on
account and
assets in
course of
construction
£m

Land and
buildings
£m

59.2
4.5
(0.7)
—
63.0
6.0
(1.9)
0.2
—
67.3

28.0
4.2
—
(0.5)
31.7
4.5
—
(1.6)
34.6
32.7
31.3

246.1
19.4
(100.3)
0.7
165.9
24.0
(5.9)
1.3
0.6
185.9

187.7
13.8
0.4
(98.4)
103.5
15.7
0.7
(5.1)
114.8
71.1
62.4

1.0
1.2
—
(0.7)
1.5
—
—
(1.5)
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1.5

Land and 
Buildings1
£m

Fixtures,
fittings, and
equipment
£m

Total
£m

306.3
25.1
(101.0)
—
230.4
30.0
(7.8)
—
0.6
253.2

215.7
18.0
0.4
(98.9)
135.2
20.2
0.7
(6.7)
149.4
103.8
95.2

Total
£m

13.5
0.6
(6.4)
7.7

13.5
(5.9)
7.6

12.7
—
(5.6)
7.1

12.7
(5.1)
7.6

Minimum 
lease 
payments
2014
£m

1.1
4.5
11.3
16.9

0.8
0.6
(0.8)
0.6

0.8
(0.8)
—

Interest
2014
£m

0.8
2.4
2.8
6.0

Principle
2014
£m

0.3
2.1
8.5
10.9

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201513.  INVENTORIES

Finished goods for resale

 2015
£m

149.3

 2014
£m

150.2

Finished goods inventories include £22.4m (2014: £19.6m) of provisions to carry inventories at fair value less costs to sell where such value is lower than cost. 
The Group did not reverse any unutilised provisions during the period.

During the period £12.1m was recognised as an expense in respect of the write down of inventories (2014: £11.2m) to net realisable value. No inventories are 
held as security for external borrowings.

14.  TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Falling due within one year:
Trade receivables
Less: provision for impairment of receivables
Trade receivables — net
Other receivables
Prepayments and accrued income

 2015
£m

15.9
(0.4)
15.5
7.9
32.4
55.8

During the period the Group charged the provision with £0.1m (2014: £0.3m) for the impairment of trade receivables and utilised £nil (2014: £0.6m).

The following table shows the age of financial assets that are past due and for which no provision for bad or doubtful debts has been raised:

Neither past due nor impaired
Past due by 1–30 days
Past due by 31–90 days
Past due by 91–180 days
Past due by more than 180 days

 2015
£m

14.3
2.1
1.4
0.6
—
18.4

 2014
£m

16.5
(0.2)
16.3
5.6
30.9
52.8

 2014
£m

16.7
1.5
0.8
1.4
0.2
20.6

The Group does not have any individually significant customers and so no significant concentration of credit risk.

Based on historic default rates and extensive analysis of the underlying customers’ credit ratings, the Group believes that no impairment allowance is 
necessary in respect of trade receivables not past due or past due by up to 30 days.

The directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates their fair value. Financial assets in the scope of IAS 39 include all 
trade receivables and £2.9m (2014: £4.3m) of other receivables.

15.  CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash at bank and in hand

 2015
£m

22.4

 2014
£m

5.3

The Group’s banking arrangements are subject to a netting facility whereby credit balances may be offset against the indebtedness of certain other Group 
companies.

97

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

16.  BORROWINGS

Current

Unsecured bank overdraft
Finance lease liabilities

Non-current
Unsecured bank loan and other borrowings1
Finance lease liabilities

 2015
£m

22.3
0.6
22.9

50.7
10.6
61.3

 2014
£m

10.0
0.3
10.3

84.0
10.6
94.6

1.  The above borrowings are stated net of unamortised issue costs of £2.3m (2014: £2.0m).

The Group’s current debt facility came into effect from 14 November 2014 and is a five-year £170m revolving credit facility starting from that date. The facility 
carries an interest rate of LIBOR plus a margin which is variable based on the gearing measures as set out in the facility covenant certificate and which is 
currently 125 basis points. Both utilisation and non-utilisation fees are also applicable being charged when utilisation rises above a set percentage with non-
utilisation based on a set percentage of the applicable margin. These charges are based on market rates as are the commitment fees as mentioned below.

The Group had the following undrawn committed borrowing facilities available at each balance sheet date in respect of which all conditions precedent had 
been met:

Expiring within 1 year
Expiring between 1 and 2 years
Expiring between 2 and 5 years

 2015
£m

20.0
—
97.0
117.0

 2014
£m

1.0
—
114.0
115.0

The overdraft facility expiring within one year is an annual facility subject to review at various dates during the period. The facility of £117.0m (2014: £114.0m) 
relates to the Group’s revolving credit facility. All these facilities incurred commitment fees at market rates.

17.  TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Other taxation and social security payable
Other payables
Deferred income — lease incentives
Accruals and other deferred income

Non-current liabilities
Deferred income — lease incentives

18.  PROVISIONS 

At 28 March 2014
Charged during the period
Utilised during the period
Released during the period
At 3 April 2015
Analysed as:
Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities

 2015
£m

107.8
15.7
9.7
3.9
44.3
181.4

31.5

Property 
related
£m

Other 
trading
£m

9.7
2.3
(1.1)
(0.7)
10.2

7.6
2.6

8.6
5.9
(5.6)
(0.3)
8.6

3.0
5.6

 2014
£m

79.4
13.4
15.0
3.7
48.0
159.5

28.8

Total
£m

18.3
8.2
(6.7)
(1.0)
18.8

10.6
8.2

Property related provisions consist of costs associated with vacant property, rent reviews and dilapidations. Also included are prior period non-recurring costs 
(note 5) relating to liabilities in respect of previous assignments of leases where the lessee has entered into administration subsequent to the period end. In 
the current year a finalisation of the Group’s guarantor obligations in respect of the Focus DIY stores has resulted in a release of £0.2m (2014: £0.2m) of the 
original amounts provided. The provision in relation to these Focus DIY stores is now nil.

Other trading provisions comprise a sales returns provision and a provision for the costs associated with the cessation of the standalone cycle concept 
‘BikeHut’, including closure of stores where necessary, an employer/product liability provision and provision for unused gift vouchers in issue.

98

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201519.  DEFERRED TAX
The following are the major deferred tax assets and liabilities recognised by the Group and movements thereon in the current and prior reporting periods.

At 29 March 2013
Credit to the income statement
Credit to other comprehensive income
Credit to equity
At 28 March 2014
Credit/(charge) to the income statement
Charge to other comprehensive income
Acquisition of subsidiary
Credit to equity
At 3 April 2015

Property 
related items
£m

Short term 
timing 
differences 
£m

Share-based 
payments
£m

Intangible 
assets
£m

(1.0)
0.9
—
—
(0.1)
1.1
—
—
—
1.0

3.6
0.3
0.8
—
4.7
—
(1.2)
—
—
3.5

0.6
0.5
—
0.9
2.0
(0.3)
—
—
0.3
2.0

(2.9)
0.7
—
—
(2.2)
0.4
—
(0.6)
—
(2.4)

Total
£m

0.3
2.4
0.8
0.9
4.4
1.2
(1.2)
(0.6)
0.3
4.1

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are offset when the group has a legally enforceable right to do so and when the deferred income taxes relate to the 
same fiscal authority. The offset amounts are as follows:

Deferred tax assets
Deferred tax liabilities

20.  FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND RELATED DISCLOSURES
TREASURY POLICY
The Group’s treasury department’s main responsibilities are to:

•	 Ensure adequate funding and liquidity for the Group;

•	 Manage the interest risk of the Group’s debt;

•	

Invest surplus cash; 

•	 Manage the clearing bank operations of the Group, and

•	 Manage the foreign exchange risk on its non-sterling cash flows.

3 April
2015
£m

6.5
(2.4)
4.1

28 March 
2014
£m

6.7
(2.3)
4.4

Treasury activities are delegated by the Board to the Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”). The CFO controls policy and performance through the line management 
structure to the Group Treasurer and by reference to the Treasury Committee. The Treasury Committee meets regularly to monitor the performance of the 
Treasury function. 

Policies for managing financial risks are governed by Board approved policies and procedures, which are reviewed on an annual basis. 

The Group’s debt management policy is to provide an appropriate level of funding to finance the Business Plan over the medium term at a competitive cost 
and ensure flexibility to meet the changing needs of the Group. Details of the Group’s current borrowing facilities are contained in note 16.

The key risks that the Group faces from a treasury perspective are as follows:

MARKET RISK
The Group’s exposure to market risk predominantly relates to interest, currency and commodity risk. These are discussed further below. Commodity risk 
is due to the Group’s products being manufactured from metals and other raw materials, subject to price fluctuation. The Group mitigates this risk through 
negotiating fixed purchase costs or maintaining flexibility over the specification of finished products produced by its supply chain to meet fluctuations.

INTEREST RATE RISK
The Group’s policy aims to manage the interest cost of the Group within the constraints of the Business Plan and its financial covenants. The Group’s 
borrowings are currently subject to floating rate interest rates and the Group will continue to monitor movements in the swap market. 

If interest rates on floating rate borrowings (i.e. cash and cash equivalents and bank borrowings which attract interest at floating rates) were to change by + or 
– 1% the impact on the results in the Income Statement and equity would be a decrease/increase of £0.5m (2014: £0.6m).

Interest rate movements on deposits, obligations under finance leases, trade payables, trade receivables, and other financial instruments do not present a 
material exposure to the Group’s balance sheet.

99

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

20.  FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND RELATED DISCLOSURES CONTINUED
CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for shareholders 
and benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital.

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue 
new shares or sell assets to reduce debt. 

The Group manages capital by operating within debt ratios. These ratios are net debt to Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation 
(“EBITDA”) and fixed charge cover. Fixed charge cover is calculated as being EBITDA plus operating lease charges as a multiple of interest and operating lease 
charges. The Group also uses a ratio of lease adjusted net debt to EBITDA; this is calculated as being net debt and leases capitalised at eight times, as a 
multiple of EBITDA plus operating lease charges. 

FAIR VALUE DISCLOSURES
The fair values of each class of financial assets and liabilities is the carrying amount, based on the following assumptions:

Trade receivables, trade payables and finance lease obligations, 
short-term deposits and borrowings
Long-term borrowings

Forward currency contracts

The fair value approximates to the carrying amount because of the short maturity of these 
instruments, using an interest rate of 7.1% for long term finance lease obligations.
The fair value of bank loans and other loans approximates to the carrying value reported 
in the balance sheet as the majority are floating rate where payments are reset to market 
rates at intervals of less than one year.
The fair value is determined using the market forward rates at the reporting date and the 
outright contract rate.

FAIR VALUE HIERARCHY
Financial instruments carried at fair value are required to be measured by reference to the following levels:

•	 Level 1: quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

•	 Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly  

(i.e. derived from prices); and

•	 Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

All financial instruments carried at fair value have been measured by a Level 2 valuation method.

The fair value of financial assets and liabilities are as follows:

Cash and cash equivalents
Loans and receivables 
Forward exchange contracts used for hedging (assets)
Total financial assets
Trade and other payables — held at amortised cost
Borrowings at amortised cost
Finance leases
Forward exchange contracts used for hedging (liabilities)
Total financial liabilities

 2015
£m

22.4
18.4
3.9
44.7
(157.6)
(53.0)
(11.2)
(0.1)
(221.9)

 2014
£m

5.3
20.6
—
25.9
(135.7)
(86.0)
(10.9)
(2.1)
(234.7)

Trade and other payables within the scope of IAS 39 include all trade payables, all other payables and £40.1m (2014: £41.3m) of accruals and deferred 
income.

CREDIT RISK
The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was £44.7m 
(2014: £25.9m) as detailed in the table above.

FOREIGN CURRENCY RISK
The Group has a significant transaction exposure with increasing direct-sourced purchases from its suppliers in the Far East, with most of the trade being in 
US Dollars. The Group’s policy is to manage the foreign exchange transaction exposures of the business to ensure the actual costs do not exceed the budget 
costs by more than 10% (excluding increases in the base cost of the product). 

The Group does not hedge either economic exposure or the translation exposure arising from the profits, assets and liabilities of non-sterling businesses whilst 
they remain immaterial.

During the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015, the foreign exchange management policy was to hedge via forward contract purchase between 75% and 80% of the 
material foreign exchange transaction exposures on a rolling 18-month basis. Hedging is performed through the use of foreign currency bank accounts and 
forward foreign exchange contracts. 

100

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201520.  FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND RELATED DISCLOSURES CONTINUED
The carrying amount of the Group’s foreign currency denominated monetary assets and monetary liabilities at the reporting date is as follows:

Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables

3 April 2015

28 March 2014

USD
£m

6.4
(19.7)
(13.3)

Other
£m

1.0
(0.7)
0.3

USD
£m

0.3
(19.3)
(19.0)

Other
£m

0.5
—
0.5

The table below shows the Group’s sensitivity to foreign exchange rates on its US dollar financial instruments, the major currency in which the Group’s 
derivatives are denominated. 

10% appreciation of the US dollar
10% depreciation of the US dollar

 2015
Increase/
(decrease) in 
equity
£m

 2014
Increase/
(decrease) in 
equity
£m

13.0
(4.0)

9.2
(7.6)

A strengthening/weakening of Sterling, as indicated, against the USD at 3 April 2015 would have (decreased)/increased equity and profit or loss by the 
amounts shown above. This analysis is based on foreign currency exchange rate variances that the Group considered to be reasonably possible at the end of 
the reporting period. The analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant. 

The movements in equity relates to the fair value movements on the Group’s forward contracts that are used to hedge future stock purchases. 

PENSION LIABILITY RISK
The Group has no association with any defined-benefit pension scheme and therefore carries no deferred, current or future liabilities in respect of such a 
scheme. The Group operates a number of Group Personal Pension Plans for colleagues.

LIQUIDITY RISK
The Group ensures that it has sufficient cash or loan facilities to meet all its commitments when they fall due by ensuring that there is sufficient cash or working 
capital facilities to meet the cash requirements of the Group for the current Business Plan. The minimum liquidity level is currently set at £30m, such that under 
Treasury Policy the maximum drawings would be £140m of the £170m available facility, to include the Overdraft Facility of £20m.

The process to manage the risk is to ensure there are contracts in place for key suppliers, detailing the payment terms, and for providers of debt, the Group 
ensured that such counterparties used for credit transactions held at least an ‘A-’ credit rating at the time of amend and extend agreement (November 2014). 
Ancillary business is currently being tendered with the five banks within the new banking group. Following the completion of the amend and extend agreement, 
at the year-end the banks within this new group maintained a credit rating of A- or above, in line with Treasury policy. The counterparty credit risk is reviewed in 
the Treasury report, which is forwarded to the Treasury Committee and the Treasurer reviews credit exposure on a daily basis.

The risk is measured through review of forecast liquidity each month by the Treasurer to determine whether there are sufficient credit facilities to meet forecast 
requirements, and through monitoring covenants on a regular basis to ensure there are no significant breaches, which would lead to an “Event of Default”. 
Calculations are submitted bi-annually to the Group banking agent. There have been no breaches of covenants during the reported periods.

The contractual maturities of finance leases are disclosed in note 12. All trade and other payables are due within one year.

The contractual maturity of bank borrowings, including estimated interest payments and excluding the impact of netting agreements is shown below:

Due less than one year
Expiring between 1 and 2 years
Expiring between 2 and 5 years 
Expiring after 5 years
Contractual cash flows
Carrying amount

3 April 
2015
Bank 
borrowings
£m

28 March 
2014
Bank 
borrowings
£m

1.5
1.5
57.0
—
60.0
50.7

2.4
2.2
89.6
—
94.2
84.0

101

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

20.  FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND RELATED DISCLOSURES CONTINUED
The following table provides an analysis of the anticipated contractual cash flows for the Group’s forward currency contracts. Cash flows receivable in foreign 
currencies are translated using spot rates as at 3 April 2015 (28 March 2014).

2015

2014

Receivables
£m

Payables
£m

Receivables
£m

Payables
£m

Due less than one year
Due between 1 and 2 years
Contractual cash flows
Fair value

78.5
6.0
84.5
3.9

(74.8)
(5.9)
(80.7)
(0.1)

83.2
—
83.2
—

It is not expected that the cash flows included in the maturity analysis could occur significantly earlier, or at significantly different amounts. 

21.  CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Ordinary shares of 1p each:

Allotted, called up and fully paid

 2015
Number of 
shares

199,063,222

 2015
£000

1,991

 2014
Number of 
shares

199,063,222

(85.3)
—
(85.3)
(2.1)

 2014
£000

1,991

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per share at meetings of the 
Company. All shares rank equally with regard to the Company’s residual assets.

During the current period there has been no movement in the Company’s share capital (2014: no movement). Share premium has remained at £151.0m (2014: 
£151.0m) as a result of there being no transactions.

In total the Company received proceeds of £0.7m (2014: £2.1m) from the exercise of share options.

INVESTMENT IN OWN SHARES
At 3 April 2015 the Company held in Trust 4,745,633 (2014: 5,017,202) of its own shares with a nominal value of £47,456 (2014: £50,172). The Trust has 
waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market value of these shares at 3 April 
2015 was £21.7m (2014: £23.1m). In the current period nil (2014: 1,014,456) were repurchased and transferred into the Trust, with 271,569 (2014: 649,064) 
reissued on exercise of share options.

OTHER RESERVES
CAPITAL REDEMPTION RESERVE
The capital redemption reserve has arisen following the purchase by the Company of its own shares and comprises the amount by which the distributable 
profits were reduced on these transactions in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

HEDGING RESERVE
The hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments related to hedged 
transactions that have not yet occurred. 

22.  SHARE BASED PAYMENTS
The Group has four share award plans, all of which are equity-settled schemes:

1. HALFORDS COMPANY SHARE OPTION SCHEME (‘CSOS’)
The CSOS was introduced in June 2004 and the Company has made annual grants since. Options are granted with a fixed exercise price equal to the market 
price of the shares under option at the date of grant. The contractual life of an option is 10 years.

Options granted will become exercisable on the third anniversary of the date of grant, subject to the achievement of a three year performance condition. For 
grants up to 150% of basic salary the options can only be exercised if the increase in earnings per share (“EPS”) over the period is not less than the increase in 
the Retail Price Index (“RPI”) plus 3.5% per year. In the case of grants in excess of 150% of basic salary, the excess can only be exercised in full if the increase 
is not less than RPI plus 10% per year. Exercise of an option is subject to continued employment. 

The expected volatility is based on historical volatility of a peer group of companies since the IPO in June 2004. The expected life is the average expected 
period to exercise. The risk free rate of return is the yield on zero-coupon UK government bonds.

Options were valued using the Black–Scholes option-pricing models. No performance conditions were included in the fair value calculations. 

2. HALFORDS SHARESAVE SCHEME
The SAYE is open to all employees with eligible employment service. Options may be exercised under the scheme if the option holder completes his saving 
contract for a period of three years and then not more than six months thereafter. Special provisions allow early exercise in the case of death, injury, disability, 
redundancy, retirement or because the company or business which employs the option holder is transferred out of the Group, or in the event of a change in 
control, reconstruction or winding up of the Company.

Options were valued using the Black–Scholes option-pricing models. 

102

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201522.  SHARE BASED PAYMENTS CONTINUED
3. PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN
The introduction of a Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) was approved at the Annual General Meeting in August 2005 awarding the Executive Directors and 
certain senior management conditional rights to receive shares. Annual schemes have been approved for each year from 2005.

The extent to which such rights vest will depend upon the Company’s performance over the three-year period following the award date. The vesting of 50% 
of the awards will be determined by the Company’s relative total shareholder return (“TSR”) performance and the vesting of the other 50% by the Company’s 
absolute EPS performance against RPI. The Company’s TSR performance will be measured against the FTSE 350 general retailers as a comparator group. No 
retesting will be permitted. 

The TSR element of the options granted under the schemes has been valued using a model developed by Deloitte. The Deloitte model uses the Group’s share 
price volatility, the correlation between comparator companies and the vesting schedule attaching to the PSP tranche rather than generating a large number of 
simulations of share price and TSR performance to determine the fair value of the award using a Monte Carlo model. 

For 2009 awards onwards, the Committee has recommended the reinvestment of dividends earned on award shares, such shares to invest in proportion 
to the vesting of the original award shares. This is in line with best practice as contained in the ABI guidelines on executive remuneration. Following this 
recommendation the shares awarded in 2011, 2012 and 2013 under the Performance Share Plan earned final dividends of 9.1p per share and were reinvested 
in shares at a cost of £4.82 per share. Shares awarded in 2012, 2013 and 2014 under the PSP earned interim dividends of 5.5p per share and were 
reinvested in shares at a cost of £4.59 per share.

Changes to the performance criteria of the PSP in relation to the awards granted during the prior year were made by the Remuneration Committee. These 
changes were made in order to create better alignment with the Company’s three-year strategic priorities following the Getting Into Gear programme. The 
awards are weighted 25% towards Group revenue growth targets and 75% towards Group EBITDA growth targets. The core award remains at 150% of base 
salary with a multiplier being introduced of 1.5x the core award if exceptional levels of performance are achieved. The shares vesting as part of this multiplier 
calculation will attract a retention period of two years. In order to focus management the awards will be underpinned by a minimum Group EBITDA, and a net 
debt to EBITDA ratio no greater than 1.5x throughout the three-year performance period. 

4. CO-INVESTMENT SHARE PLAN
In 2012 the Company adopted the Halfords Group plc 2012 Co-Investment Plan. This plan was adopted for the sole purpose of making a one-off award to the 
Group’s new CEO. No further awards either to the Group’s CEO or other executives will be made under this plan. 

On 4 October 2012 the new CEO purchased 164,056 Halfords Group plc shares at a price of 302.22 pence per share and will be entitled to receive Matching 
Shares equivalent to a maximum of 3.5 times this investment. Subject to continued employment these shares may vest up to a third in November 2015, up 
to two thirds in November 2016 and in full in November 2017, depending on the following Threshold (30% vesting) and Maximum (100% vesting) share price 
performance by Halfords:

November
2015
2016
2017

Threshold
350p
385p
425p

Maximum
400p
440p
485p

Matching Shares have been granted in the form of nil cost options, with the participant having until the tenth anniversary of the date of grant to exercise the 
options, and will lapse on a pro-rata basis if the required number of Investment Shares is not retained to the final vesting date.

At each relevant vesting date the participant may decide to exercise any portion of the award that has vested based on the performance at that time (in which 
case any unvested shares in that tranche in respect of which the share price target has not been met will lapse) or roll forward that tranche in full subject to 
performance testing at the next vesting date. In the latter case the participant will forfeit the right to exercise any awards that had become capable of vesting at 
the earlier vesting date. 

The Participant will be entitled to receive an amount equivalent to the dividends that would have been paid either in cash or on a re-invested basis in shares 
during the period from grant to exercise in respect of the number of Matching Shares that vest.

The Barrier Black–Scholes Model is an adapted Black–Scholes Model and is used to calculate the estimated fair values of the Co-Investment Plan Options to 
include the impact of the share price based performance conditions. Using this method the fair value of the options at the time of grant was estimated to be 
£1.35 per share. 

The CEO left the Group on 30 April 2015 and so the share option charges made to date have been reversed. There are currently no options in circulation in 
relation to this Plan.

The Group Income Statement charge recognised in respect of share-based payments for the current period is £1.4m (2014: £1.0m).

The following tables reconcile the number of share options outstanding and the weighted average exercise price (WAEP) for all share award plans except for 
the Co-Investment Plan, details of which are covered above.

103

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

22.  SHARE BASED PAYMENTS CONTINUED
FOR THE PERIOD ENDED 3 APRIL 2015

Outstanding at start of year
Granted
Shares representing dividends reinvested
Forfeited
Exercised
Lapsed
Outstanding at end of year
Exercisable at end of year
Exercise price range (£)
Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

FOR THE PERIOD ENDED 28 MARCH 2014

Outstanding at start of year
Granted
Shares representing dividends reinvested
Forfeited
Exercised
Lapsed
Outstanding at end of year
Exercisable at end of year
Exercise price range (£)
Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

CSOS

SAYE

PSP

Number (’000)

WAEP (£) Number (’000)

WAEP (£) Number (’000)

WAEP (£)

4,765
1,513
—
—
(78)
(822)
5,378
342

2.96
4.69
—
—
3.23
2.96
3.45
3.36
2.20 to 5.03
7.9

2,479
671
—
—
(193)
(354)
2,603
—

1.88
3.82
—
—
2.32
2.76
2.23
—
1.56 to 3.82
1.0

1,878
676
52
(75)
–
(453)
2,078
—

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.3

CSOS

SAYE

PSP

Number (’000)

WAEP (£) Number (’000)

WAEP (£) Number (’000)

WAEP (£)

5,191
1,780
—
—
(614)
(1,592)
4,765
485

3.10
3.71
—
—
3.22
4.35
2.96
3.25
2.20 to 5.03
8.0

2,351
543
—
(65)
(35)
(315)
2,479
62

1.76
2.54
—
2.27
2.37
1.90
1.88
4.15
1.56 to 4.15
1.4

1,216
748
58
(144)
—
—
1,878
—

The following table gives the assumptions applied to the options granted in the respective periods shown:

Grant date

Share price at grant date 
Exercise price
Expected volatility
Option life (years)
Expected life (years)
Risk free rate
Expected dividend yield
Probability of forfeiture
Weighted average fair value of options granted

CSOS

4.79
4.69
34%
10
4.85
1.86%
2.99%
33%
£1.15

53 weeks to 3 April 2015
SAYE

4.83
3.82
35%
3
3.5
1.56%
2.96%
44%
£1.40

PSP

4.79
0.00
36%
3
3
—
—
30%
£4.79

CSOS

3.66
3.71
36%
10
4.85
1.34%
4.67%
33%
£0.72

52 weeks to 28 March 2014
SAYE

3.70
2.54
35%
3
3.5
0.81%
4.63%
44%
£1.11

As the PSP awards have a nil exercise price the risk free rate of return does not have any effect on the estimated fair value and therefore is excluded from the 
above table.

23.  COMMITMENTS

Capital expenditure: Contracted but not provided

 2015
£m

0.9

At 3 April 2015, the Group was committed to making payments in respect of non-cancellable operating leases in the following periods:

Within one year
Later than one year and less than five years
After five years

Land and
buildings
 2015
£m

76.9
294.8
265.4
637.1

Other 
assets
 2015
£m

2.8
4.9
0.4
8.1

Land and
buildings
 2014
£m

81.2
271.6
266.1
618.9

 2014
£m

0.4

Other 
assets
 2014
£m

2.1
3.7
—
5.8

The Group leases a number of stores and warehouses under operating leases of varying length for which incentives/premiums are received/paid under the 
relevant lease agreements. Land and buildings have been considered separately for lease classification. The operating lease commitments are shown before 
total future minimum receipts of sublet income, which totalled £4.2m (2014: £5.0m).

104

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.5

PSP

3.66
0.00
36%
3
3
—
—
30%
£3.66

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 201524.  PENSIONS
Employees are offered membership of the Halfords Pension, which is a contract based plan, where each member has their own individual pension policy, 
which they monitor independently. The costs of contributions to the scheme are charged to the income statement in the period that they arise. The 
contributions to the scheme for the period amounted to £5.1m (2014: £3.6m).

In accordance with Government initiatives Halfords operates an automatic enrolment process with regards to its pension arrangements. Employees who are 
aged between 22 and state pension age, earn more than £10,000 a year, and work in the UK are automatically enrolled into the Group pension arrangement. 
Employees retain the right to withdraw from this pension arrangement however election of this choice must be made.

25.  CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The Group’s banking arrangements include the facility for the bank to provide a number of guarantees in respect of liabilities owed by the Group during the 
course of its trading. In the event of any amount being immediately payable under the guarantee, the bank has the right to recover the sum in full from the 
Group. The total amount of guarantees in place at 3 April 2015 amounted to £3.9m (2014: £5.3m).

The Group’s banking arrangements are subject to a netting facility whereby credit balances may be offset against the indebtedness of other Group companies.

Following the judgment passed by an Employment Appeal Tribunal on 4 November 2014 regarding the inclusion of overtime in holiday pay calculations, 
the Group has a potential liability for any claims made by employees for underpayment of holiday pay. Given the unclear ruling regarding retrospective / 
prospective application of the ruling (and the likelihood of appeal), no charge has been made for this potential liability in the year. Given the lack of clarity, at this 
moment in time no accurate estimate can be made.

26.  RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
The Groups ultimate parent company is Halfords Group plc. A listing of all principal trading subsidiary undertakings is shown within the financial statements of 
the Company on pages 106 to 111.

TRANSACTIONS WITH KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
The key management personnel of the Group comprise the Executive and Non-Executive directors and the Halfords Limited and Halfords Autocentres 
management boards. The details of the remuneration, long-term incentive plans, shareholdings and share option entitlements of individual Directors are 
included in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 70. Key management compensation is disclosed in note 4.

Directors of the Company control 0.14% of the ordinary shares of the company. 

27.  OFF BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS
The Group has no off balance sheet arrangements to disclose as required by S410A of the Companies Act 2006.

28.  POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 
On the 13 April 2015 the Group announced the resignation of its Chief Financial Officer, Andrew Findlay, with a leaving date of the end of October 2015.

105

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

COMPANY BALANCE 
SHEET

Fixed assets
Investments
Current assets
Debtors falling due within one year
Debtors falling due after one year
Cash and cash equivalents

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year
Net current assets
Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year
Net assets
Capital and reserves
Called up share capital
Share premium account
Investment in own shares
Capital redemption reserve
Profit and loss account
Total shareholders’ funds

  3 April
2015
£m

  28 March 
2014
£m

Notes

4

5
5

6

6

8
9
9
9
9

16.5

295.4

648.3
—
2.5
650.8
(260.8)
390.0
(50.7)
355.8

2.0
151.0
(13.6)
0.3
216.1
355.8

78.3
278.6
1.8
358.7
(0.2)
358.5
(326.4)
327.5

2.0
151.0
(14.3)
0.3
188.5
327.5

The notes on pages 109 to 111 are an integral part of the Company’s financial statements.

The Company has elected to prepare its financial statements under UK GAAP and the accounting policies are outlined on page 108.

The financial statements on pages 106 to 107 were approved by the Board of Directors on 4 June 2015 and were signed on its behalf by: 

Andrew Findlay 
Chief Financial Officer

Company number: 04457314

106

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015 
 
 
  
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN TOTAL SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS 
IN TOTAL SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

For the period

Profit for the period
Shares options exercised
Purchase of own shares
Employee share options
Dividends 
Distribution in-specie
Net increase/(decrease) in total shareholders’ funds
Opening total shareholders’ funds
Closing total shareholders’ funds

53 weeks to
3 April
 2015
£m

52 weeks to
28 March 2014
£m

6.6
0.7
—
1.4
(28.4)
48.0
28.3
327.5
355.8

21.2
2.1
(3.2)
1.0
(27.7)
—
(6.6)
334.1
327.5

107

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ACCOUNTING
POLICIES

BASIS OF PREPARATION
The accounts of the Company are prepared for the period up to the Friday closest to 31 March each year. Consequently, the financial statements for the 
current period cover the 53 weeks to 3 April 2015, whilst the comparative period covered the 52 weeks to 28 March 2014. The accounts are prepared under 
the historical cost convention, except where Financial Reporting Standards requires an alternative treatment in accordance with applicable UK accounting 
standards and specifically in accordance with the accounting policies set out below. The principal variation to the historical cost convention relates to share 
based payments.

A consolidated cash flow statement has been included in the Halfords Group plc consolidated accounts. The Company has therefore taken advantage of the 
exemption under FRS 1 (revised 1996) “Cash flow statements” not to produce a cash flow statement. 

EBT’s are accounted for under UITF 32 and are consolidated on the basis that the parent has control, thus the assets and liabilities of the EBT are included on 
the Company balance sheet and shares held by the EBT in the Company are presented as a deduction from equity.

The Company has taken the available exemption not to provide disclosures required by FRS 29 “Financial instruments: disclosures”.

SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The Company operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans that are awarded to employees of the Company’s subsidiary 
undertakings.

In accordance with UITF Abstract 44 ‘FRS 20 (IFRS 2) – Group and treasury share transactions’ the fair value of the employee services received under such 
schemes is recognised as an expense in the subsidiary undertaking’s financial statements, which benefit from the employee services. The Company has 
recognised the fair value of the share based payments as an increase to equity with a corresponding adjustment to investments.

Fair values are determined using appropriate option pricing models. The total fair value recognised is adjusted to reflect the number of awards for which the 
related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based on the number 
of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the vesting date.

At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the number of share incentives that are expected to vest. The impact of the revision of 
original estimates, if any, is recognised as an adjustment to equity, with a corresponding adjustment to investments, over the remaining vesting period. 

INVESTMENTS
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are stated at the original cost of the investments. Provision is made against cost where, in the opinion of the directors, 
the value of the investments has been impaired.

DIVIDENDS
Final dividends are recognised in the Company’s financial statements in the period in which the dividends are approved by shareholders. Interim equity 
dividends are recognised in the period they are paid.

108

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1.  PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT
The Company made a profit before dividends paid for the financial profit of £6.6m (52 week period to 28 March 2014: £21.2m). The directors have taken 
advantage of the exemption available under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and not presented a profit and loss account for the Company alone.

2.  FEES PAYABLE TO THE AUDITORS
Fees payable by the Group to KPMG LLP and their associates during the period are detailed in note 3 to the Group financial statements. In the 53 weeks to  
3 April 2015 the Company expensed £nil (2014: £nil) in fees relating to KPMG LLP.

3.  STAFF COSTS
The Company has no employees other than the Directors. Full details of the Directors’ remuneration’ and interests, including those details required by 
‘Schedule 5, are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 56 to 70 which forms part of the audited information.

4.  

INVESTMENTS 

Shares in Group undertaking
Cost
As at 28 March 2014
Additions — share based payments
Distribution in-specie (a)
At 3 April 2015

 £m

295.4
1.4
(280.3)
16.5

(a) During the year the Company received a dividend in-specie, being a receivable due from another group company, which is not expected to be settled in the 
near future. As a result the value of the Company’s investment in the IreCo 1 company (wound up during the year) fell below the amount at which it was 
stated in the Company’s accounting records. Schedule 1 to the Companies Act 2006, The Large and Medium sized Companies and Groups (Accounts 
and Reports) Regulations 2008 (SI 2008 No. 410) requires that the investment be written down accordingly and that the amount be charged as a loss in 
the Company’s profit and loss account. However, the Directors consider that, as there has been no overall loss to the Company, it would fail to give a true 
and fair view to charge that diminution to the Company’s profit and loss account for the year and the cost of the investment of £280.3m should instead 
be re-allocated to the carrying amount of the Company’s receivable, so as to recognise in the Company’s individual balance sheet the effective cost to 
the company of the receivable. Given that the receivable has a fair value of £328.3m, the company has recognised an unrealised gain of £48.0m through 
the Statement of Recognised Gains and Losses (‘STRGL’). The effect of this departure is to increase the holding company’s total recognised gains for 
the financial year and the carrying amount of the receivable in the holding company’s balance sheet by £280.3m. The Group financial statements are not 
affected by this transfer.

During FY14 the Group began an exercise in order to restructure the underlying companies of the Group. During the year this exercise led to a distribution 
in-specie of discounted loan notes from Halfords Ireco 1 Limited to Halfords Group plc. The following subsidiaries have now been wound up: Halfords 
Holdings (Jersey) 1 Limited; Halfords Holdings (Jersey) 2 Limited; Halfords Holdings (Jersey) 3 Limited; Halfords Finco (Jersey) Limited; The Halfords Group plc 
Discretionary Trust; The Halfords Payment Services Limited Discretionary Trust; Halfords Ireco 1 Limited; and Halfords Ireco 2 Limited.

The investments represent shares in the following subsidiary undertakings as at 3 April 2015 and the fair value of share based compensation plans that are 
awarded to employees of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings. The Company has taken advantage of Section 410(2) of the Companies Act 2006 to list 
only its principal subsidiary and associated undertakings at April 2015. All of these are wholly owned by the Company or its subsidiary undertakings, registered 
in England and Wales, and operate predominantly in the United Kingdom unless otherwise stated.

Subsidiary undertaking

Halfords Holdings (2006) Limited

* Registered in England and Wales.

Incorporated
in

Great Britain*

Ordinary 
shares
percentage 
owned %

Principal Activities

100 Intermediate holding company

In the opinion of the Directors the value of the investments in the subsidiary undertakings is not less than the amount shown above.

109

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFINANCIAL STATEMENTS > NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTES TO THE 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS continued

4.  
INVESTMENTS CONTINUED
PRINCIPAL SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Company at 3 April 2015 are as follows:

Subsidiary undertaking

Halfords Holdings (2006) Limited

Halfords Holdings Limited*

Halfords Finance Limited*

Halfords Limited*

Halfords Investments (2010) LP**

Halfords Autocentres Holdings Limited*

Halfords Autocentres Limited*

Boardman Bikes Limited*

Boardman International Limited*

*   Shares held indirectly through subsidiary undertakings
**  Wholly owned indirectly through subsidiary undertakings

Principal activity

Intermediate holding company

Intermediate holding company

Intermediate holding company

Retailing of auto parts, accessories, cycles and cycle accessories

Intermediate holding partnership

Intermediate holding company

Car servicing

Cycle design

Cycle design and cycle sales

All subsidiary undertakings are incorporated in Great Britain and registered in England and Wales. The only subsidiaries to trade during the year were  
Halfords Limited and Halfords Autocentres Limited.

% Ownership 
of ordinary 
equity shares

100

100

100

100

—

100

100

100

100

 2014
£m

78.3
78.3

 2015
£m

648.3
648.3

—

278.6

5.  DEBTORS

Falling due within one year:
Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Falling due after more than one year:
Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Amounts owed by Group undertakings are subject to interest. At 3 April 2015 the amounts bear interest at a rate of 1.75% (2014: 4.83%). During the year the 
intercompany interest rate was reset in order to better reflect the cost of borrowing as stated under the terms of the Group borrowing facility.

 2015
£m

16.5
244.3
260.8

50.7
—
50.7

2015
£m

16.5

50.7
67.2

 2014
£m

—
0.2
0.2

84.0
242.4
326.4

 2014
£m

—

84.0
84.0

6.   CREDITORS

Falling due within one year:
Bank borrowings (note 7)
Accruals and deferred income

Falling due after more than one year:
Bank borrowings (note 7)
Amounts owed to Group undertakings:

7.   BORROWINGS

Current
Unsecured overdraft
Non-current
Expiring between two and five years

The above borrowings are stated net of unamortised issue costs of £2.3m (2014: £2.0m).

Details of the Company’s borrowing facilities are in note 16 of the Group’s financial statements.

110

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 20158.   EQUITY SHARE CAPITAL

Ordinary shares of 1p each:

Allotted, called up and fully paid

 2015
Number of 
shares

199,063,222

 2015
£000

1,991

 2014
Number of 
shares

199,063,222

 2014
£000

1,991

During the current period there has been no movement in the Company’s share capital (2014: no movement). Share premium has remained at £151.0m (2014: 
£151.0m) as a result of there being no transactions.

In total the Company received proceeds of £0.7m (2014: £2.1m) from the exercise of share options.

POTENTIAL ISSUE OF ORDINARY SHARES
The Company has three employee share option schemes, which were set up following the Company’s flotation. Further information regarding these schemes 
can be found in note 22 of the Group’s financial statements.

INTEREST IN OWN SHARES
At 3 April 2015 the Company held in Trust 4,745,633 (2014: 5,017,202) of its own shares with a nominal value of £47,456 (2014: £50,172). The Trust has 
waived any entitlement to the receipt of dividends in respect of its holding of the Company’s ordinary shares. The market value of these shares at 3 April 2015 
was £21.7m (2014: £23.1m).

9.   RESERVES

At 28 March 2014
Profit for the financial period 
Share options exercised
Share-based payment transactions
Distribution in-specie
Dividends 
At 3 April 2015

Share
 premium 
account
£m

Investment
 in own shares
£m

Capital
redemption 
reserve
£m

Profit and
loss account
£m

151.0
—
—
—
—
—
151.0

(14.3)
—
0.7
—
—
—
(13.6)

0.3
—
—
—
—
—
0.3

188.5
6.6
—
1.4
48.0
(28.4)
216.1

Total
£m

325.5
6.6
0.7
1.4
48.0
(28.4)
353.8

The Company settled dividends of £28.4m (2014: £27.7m) in the period, as detailed in note 8 of the Group’s financial statements. 

The Company has recognised an unrealised gain of £48.0m through the Statement of Recognised Gains and Losses following the receipt of a dividend in 
specie. Further details are provided in note 4.

Included in the profit and loss account is £166m of reserves that are not distributable (2014: £118m).

10.  RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES
Under FRS 8 “Related party disclosures” the Company is exempt from disclosing related party transactions with entities over which it wholly owns.

11.  CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The Group’s banking arrangements include the facility for the bank to provide a number of guarantees in respect of liabilities owed by the Group during the 
course of its trading. In the event of any amount being immediately payable under the guarantee, the bank has the right to recover the sum in full from the 
Group. The total amount of guarantees in place at 3 April 2015 amounted to £3.9m (2014: £5.3m).

The Company’s banking arrangements are subject to a netting facility whereby credit balances may be offset against the indebtedness of other Group 
companies.

12.  OFF BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS
The Company has no off balance sheet arrangements to disclose as required by S410A of the Companies Act 2006.

111

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015STOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSHAREHOLDER INFORMATION > FIVE YEAR RECORD

FIVE YEAR 
RECORD

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Operating expenses

Operating profit before non-recurring items 
Non-recurring operating expenses

Operating profit
Net finance costs

Profit before tax and non-recurring items
Non-recurring operating expenses

Profit before tax
Taxation
Taxation on non-recurring items
Profit attributable to equity shareholders
Basic earnings per share
Basic earnings per share before non-recurring items
Weighted average number of shares

KEY PERFORMANCE 
INDICATORS

Revenue growth
Gross margin
Operating margin
Underlying Group EBITDA
Net debt

52 weeks
to 1 April
2011
(audited)
£m

52 weeks
to 30 March
2012
(audited)
£m

52 weeks
to 29 March
2013
(audited)
£m

52 weeks
to 28 March 
2014
(audited)
£m

52 weeks
to 27 March
2015
(proforma)*
£m

869.7
(384.7)
485.0
(364.4)

128.1
(7.5)

120.6
(2.5)

125.6
(7.5)

118.1
(34.7)
2.1
85.5
40.7p
43.2p
210.4m

863.1
(390.3)
472.8
(373.7)

97.2
1.9

99.1
(5.0)

92.2
1.9

94.1
(24.8)
(0.9)
68.4
34.2p
33.7p
199.9m

871.3
(394.2)
477.1
(400.0)

78.1
(1.0)

77.1
(6.1)

72.0
(1.0)

71.0
(18.2)
(0.1)
52.7
27.2p
27.7p
194.3m

939.7
(435.5)
504.2
(426.4)

77.8
(0.2)

77.6
(5.0)

72.8
(0.2)

72.6
(17.0)
(0.1)
55.5
28.6p
28.8p
194.0m

1,004.9
(469.8)
535.1
(450.5)

84.6
(0.3)

84.3
(3.5)

81.1
(0.3)

80.8
(17.4)
(0.1)
63.3
32.5p
32.7p
194.2m

52 weeks
to 1 April
2011

+4.6%
55.8%
13.9%
£153.2m
(£103.2m)

52 weeks
to 30 March
2012

52 weeks
to 29 March
2013

52 weeks
to 28 March
2014

52 weeks
to 27 March
2015

-0.8%
54.8%
11.5%
£123.6m
(£139.2m)

+1.0%
54.8%
8.8%
£103.4m
(£110.6m)

+7.9%
53.7%
8.3%
£101.1m
(£99.6m)

+6.9%
53.2%
8.4%
£109.9m
(£61.8m)

* The statutory 53-week period to 3 April 2015 comprises reported results that are non-comparable to the 52-week periods reported in other years. To provide 
a more meaningful comparison, the above tables include the proforma 52-weeks to 27 March 2015.

112

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015COMPANY
INFORMATION

FINANCIAL CALENDAR

15 July 2015 

Q1 Trading Statement

30 July 2015 

Annual General Meeting

7 August 2015 

Final Dividend Record Date

28 August 2015 

Final Dividend Payment Date

12 November 2015 

Interim Results

18 December 2015 

Interim Dividend Record Date

REGISTERED OFFICE
Halfords Group plc
Icknield Street Drive
Redditch
Worcestershire
B98 0DE

REGISTRARS
Capita Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent
BR3 4TU

AUDITORS
KPMG Audit Plc
One Snowhill
Snow Hill Queensway

Birmingham
B4 6GH

JOINT BROKERS
Investec Bank plc
2 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7QP

J.P. Morgan Cazenove

25 Bank Street

Canary Wharf
London
E14 5JP

SOLICITORS
Clifford Chance
10 Upper Bank Street
London
E14 5JJ

113

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015FINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comOUR GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONSHAREHOLDER INFORMATION > SHAREHOLDER NOTES

114

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015Getting Into GearHalfords Group plc Integrated Annual Report for the period ended 3 April 2015INTEGRATED
REPORTING

Our second integrated report is designed 
to provide a concise overview of how we 
generate value for all stakeholders.

By following an integrated reporting model, we aim to show how our 
competitive advantage is sustainable in the short, medium, and long 
term. Although this report focuses on shareholder value generation, it 
also demonstrates how we interact with all of our stakeholders.

Page 06 BUSINESS MODEL
Evolved for a future orientation

WHAT IS INTEGRATED 
ABOUT THIS REPORT?
Our second integrated report has not only built 
upon the key changes we introduced last year, 
but has also evolved in line with developments in 
integrated reporting practices.

Our future reports will seek to keep up with 
these cutting edge developments, and in doing 
so, we hope to continually improve stakeholder 
communications. 

Here are the steps we have taken on this journey 
so far:

FUTURE ORIENTATION
Our business model continues to evolve to 
provide greater clarity on how we create value 
in the short, medium and long term, ultimately 
showing that we are sustainable. 

CONNECTIVITY 
Integrated reporting has helped us to ensure 
connectivity of our thinking in every aspect of our 
business. Our business model is informed by our 
strategic thinking, and likewise, our strategy is 
informed by sustainability and risk considerations. 
So, we have increased signposting and 
consistency between sections to show how they 
interact.

STAKEHOLDER RELATIONSHIPS
We have included the nature and quality of our 
key stakeholder relationships: how we engage 
with these groups, how we address the issues 
that affect them, and the broader picture of how 
we each contribute to deliver value.

MATERIALITY
To give an honest representation of the 
interdependencies between our resources, 
relationships and the sustainability of our 
business, we have identified the material matters 
which affect our ability to create value, and 
prioritised them in our risk considerations. They 
are also integrated into our business model and 
strategy.

Page 14 STRATEGY
Connected strategic thinking

Page 19 SUSTAINABILITY
Integrated into every aspect of business

CONSISTENCY AND COMPARABILITY
We have provided 5-year KPIs throughout this 
report to make comparisons easy, both with 
previous years’ progress and across other 
organisations. 

CONCISENESS
We have removed repetition where possible, 
increased signposting where relevant, and made 
the structure of the report logical and intuitive. 
Rather than keeping sustainability separate, we 
have integrated it throughout the report to reflect 
how it informs every business decision we make. 
We have included our key corporate responsibility 
requirements within the directors’ report on 
page 39, and pulled case studies of our charity 
initiatives into the relevant strategy pages.

RELIABILITY AND COMPLETENESS 
This report aims to approach material matters 
both positive and negative in a fair, balanced and 
understandable way.

CSR AND STRATEGIC 
EXECUTION CASE STUDIES

Throughout this report, we have included case 
studies to bring our story to life.

These case studies illustrate in more depth 
some of the specific ways in which we have 
executed our strategic objectives.

Page 32 RISK
Identifies key material interdependencies

These case studies show examples of our 
varied CSR activities which  we consider 
important to our strategic performance.

Find out more about the global drive for public 
companies to move towards integrated reporting: 

International Integrated Reporting Council 
www.theiirc.org

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015OUR GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTOCK CODE: HFDhalfords.annualreport2015.comSTRATEGIC REPORTSHAREHOLDER INFORMATIONH

a

l

f

o

r

d

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

p

e

r

i

o

d

e

n

d

e

d

3

A

p

r

i

l

2

0

1

5

Corporate and IR website 
www.halfordscompany.com

Online Annual Report 2015 
halfords.annualreport2015.com

Commercial Website 
www.halfords.com

23744-04  PROOF DOCUMENT SHELL  09-02-2015